diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'old/63431-0.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/63431-0.txt | 9109 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 9109 deletions
diff --git a/old/63431-0.txt b/old/63431-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 0094158..0000000 --- a/old/63431-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,9109 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg EBook of Trail and Trading Post, by Edward Stratemeyer - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most -other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of -the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have -to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook. - -Title: Trail and Trading Post - or The Young Hunters of the Ohio - -Author: Edward Stratemeyer - -Illustrator: J. W. Kennedy - -Release Date: October 10, 2020 [EBook #63431] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TRAIL AND TRADING POST *** - - - - -Produced by Richard Tonsing, WebRover, MFR, and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This -file was produced from images generously made available -by The Internet Archive) - - - - - - -[Illustration: The battle was now on in all its fury.—_Page 287._] - - - - - Colonial Series - - TRAIL AND TRADING POST - OR - THE YOUNG HUNTERS OF THE OHIO - - - BY - EDWARD STRATEMEYER - - Author of “With Washington in the West,” “American Boys’ Life of William - McKinley,” “Old Glory Series,” “Pan-American Series,” “Dave Porter - Series,” etc. - - _ILLUSTRATED BY J. W. KENNEDY_ - -[Illustration] - - BOSTON - LOTHROP, LEE & SHEPARD CO. - - - - - Published August, 1906 - - - COPYRIGHT, 1906, BY LOTHROP, LEE & SHEPARD CO. - - _All rights reserved_ - - TRAIL AND TRADING POST - - - Norwood Press - BERWICK & SMITH CO. - Norwood, Mass. - U. S. A. - ------------------------------------------------------------------------- - - - - - PREFACE - - -“Trail and Trading Post” is a complete story in itself, but forms the -sixth and last volume of a line known under the general title of -“Colonial Series.” - -As I have mentioned before, when I started this series I had in mind to -write not more than three volumes, telling of colonial times during the -war between France and England for the possession of Canada and the -territory bordering the Great Lakes. The first book, entitled “With -Washington in the West,” told of the disastrous Braddock campaign -against Fort Duquesne; the second, called “Marching on Niagara,” gave -many of the particulars of General Forbes’s advance against the same -French stronghold and likewise the particulars of the advance of -Generals Prideaux and Johnson against Fort Niagara; while the third -volume, “At the Fall of Montreal,” told of the heroic fighting of -General Wolfe at Quebec, and that last contest which brought this -long-drawn struggle to a close. - -The war with France was now over, but the Indians were very bitter -against the English, and in a fourth volume, called “On the Trail of -Pontiac,” were given the particulars of how that noted red warrior -formed a conspiracy among a number of tribes to exterminate the English. -The first conspiracy failed to come to a head, but Pontiac was not -disheartened, and in a fifth volume, “The Fort in the Wilderness,” were -related how the warriors under him laid siege to Fort Detroit and Fort -Pitt, and how the English under Colonel Bouquet won the bloody battle of -Bushy Run,—the last regular contest with the red men for some years to -come. - -With the Indian struggle at an end, the English were more eager than -ever to push forward to the west, to establish trading posts and -settlements, and it is with this movement that the present volume -concerns itself. The advance of the whites was watched with hatred by -the Indians, who lost no opportunity to do them injury. Among those to -push onward, to the fertile country bordering the Ohio River, were our -old friends, the Morrises—and what they did to make our glorious country -what it is to-day I leave the pages which follow to relate. - -In closing this series I wish to thank the many thousands who have shown -their appreciation of my efforts to amuse and instruct them. In penning -the volumes I have endeavored to be as accurate historically as -possible, and I trust the perusal will do my young readers much good. - - EDWARD STRATEMEYER. - - _Independence Day, 1906._ - - - - - CONTENTS - - - CHAPTER PAGE - I. A GLIMPSE OF THE PAST 1 - II. A BUFFALO AND A BEAR 9 - III. DAVE AND THE INDIAN 18 - IV. TAKEN BY SURPRISE 28 - V. THE FLIGHT TO THE RIVER 37 - VI. BACK TO THE FORT 46 - VII. THE START FOR THE EAST 56 - VIII. THE MASSACRE OF A PACK-TRAIN 65 - IX. UNDER THE CLIFF 75 - X. BARRINGFORD AS A SCOUT 85 - XI. IN WHICH WHITE BUFFALO APPEARS 95 - XII. HOME ONCE MORE 105 - XIII. AN OLD ENEMY APPEARS 115 - XIV. A FIGHT WITH A WOLVERINE 125 - XV. WOLVES, AND A SNOWSTORM 135 - XVI. SAVED BY A WINDSTORM 145 - XVII. THE JOURNEY TO THE TRADING POST 155 - XVIII. RUNNING INTO A TRAP 164 - XIX. THE SHOOTING CONTEST 174 - XX. ANOTHER LONG JOURNEY 184 - XXI. A NEW MOVE 194 - XXII. A FIGHT AMONG WILD BEASTS 204 - XXIII. THE RESCUE OF THE STRANGER 214 - XXIV. SNOWBOUND ON THE TRAIL 225 - XXV. CRUSHING NEWS 234 - XXVI. BY WAY OF THE TUNNEL 244 - XXVII. HOLDING THE TRADING POST 254 - XXVIII. IN WHICH A BATTERING RAM IS USED 264 - XXIX. FROM ENEMIES TO FRIENDS 274 - XXX. FOR LIFE OR DEATH 285 - XXXI. DAYS OF PEACE—CONCLUSION 297 - - - - - ILLUSTRATIONS - - - The battle was now on in all its fury (page 287) _Frontispiece_ - - PAGE. - Both were now getting ready to renew the contest 15 - - He glanced up, saw his dire peril, and let himself drop 49 - - “Boka must kill both before either awakens,” murmured - the Indian 77 - - “I think we had better take turns watching,” said Henry 147 - - “A bull’s-eye for Henry Morris!” 176 - - The old frontiersman swept through the opening 258 - - Bevoir pitched headlong into the smoldering campfire 298 - - - - - TRAIL AND TRADING POST - - - - - CHAPTER I - A GLIMPSE OF THE PAST - - -“If we can only get that buffalo, Henry, it will be a feather in our -cap.” - -“Right you are, Dave. But the animal may be miles and miles away by this -time. As you know, they can run a long distance when they are -frightened.” - -“Oh, yes, I know that well enough,” answered Dave Morris, as he rested -for a moment on the paddle he had been using. “I haven’t forgotten the -buffalo that once knocked our tent flat and ran away.” - -“And I haven’t forgotten how I went after him and nearly lost my life -tumbling over the rocks and down the big hill,” added Henry. “I can tell -you, I don’t want another such experience!” - -“Do you think the buffalo went around the head of the lake?” - -“He was headed that way—the last I saw of him. Let us paddle up to the -brook and go ashore. If the tracks are there we can follow them: if not, -I reckon we’ll have to give up the hunt and content ourselves with some -small game.” - -“You don’t suppose that there are any unfriendly Indians around,” -resumed Dave Morris, after a few minutes of silence, during which time -both young hunters applied themselves to the paddles of the canoe they -occupied. “I’ve had enough of fighting to last me for a long time to -come.” - -“There is really no telling about that, the redskins are so treacherous. -Down at the fort they seem to think the district for fifty miles around -is clear, but Sam Barringford told me to keep my eyes peeled—that there -is no telling yet what may happen. The war is over, but Pontiac isn’t -dead, and neither is Moon Eye, and a lot more of the other chiefs.” - -“Don’t mention Moon Eye to me,” said Dave Morris, with a shrug of his -broad shoulders. “That Indian will never forgive me for escaping from -him with Nell and the twins. I suppose he’d give a whole lot to get his -hands on me again.” - -“As for that, he’d like to get his hands on any of the men who fought -against him and his followers. The Indians think——Wait, Dave! Turn in to -the shore, quick! I just saw the buffalo. He is back of the rocks over -yonder!” - -The canoe was turned in the direction indicated with all possible speed. -Soon it glided under some overhanging bushes, and the paddles were -stowed away noiselessly. Then each of the young hunters caught up his -flint-lock musket, looked to the priming, to make certain that the -weapon was ready for use, and stepped ashore. - -“As you saw him first, you lead,” whispered Dave Morris to his -companion, and Henry led off, with the other youth close at his heels. -Both had their eyes and ears on the alert for whatever might turn up. - -As the old readers of this “Colonial Series” know, Dave and Henry Morris -were cousins, of about the same age, who when at home lived near Will’s -Creek, Virginia—close to where the town of Cumberland now stands. Dave -was the only son of a widower, James Morris, who was a well-known -trapper and fur trader. Henry came of a more numerous family, he having -an older brother Rodney and also a sister Nell, a bright miss of tender -years. - -In the first three volumes of this series, entitled, respectively, “With -Washington in the West,” “Marching on Niagara,” and “At the Fall of -Montreal,” I told how Dave worked for the first President of our country -when the latter was but a humble surveyor, and how the youth also served -under his former employer during the memorable and disastrous Braddock -advance on Fort Duquesne—held at that time, 1755, by the French, and -located where the prosperous city of Pittsburg stands to-day. This was -really the opening of the fourth intercolonial war, and was followed by -an attack on Fort Niagara, and then by assaults on Quebec, Montreal, and -other points, in which fights both Dave and Henry took active parts, -doing their duty as common soldiers to the best of their ability. - -With the close of the war between England and France, both of the young -soldiers were glad enough to return home, which they did in company with -a number of others, including Sam Barringford, a frontiersman who had -been their friend through thick and thin, and also White Buffalo, an old -chief of the Delawares, who was very friendly with all of the Morrises -and who had done them more than one service. - -Previous to the war Dave’s father had established a small trading post -in what was then considered the “far western country.” This was on the -Kinotah, a small but beautiful stream flowing into the Ohio River. The -trader had a good deal of trouble with a rascally Frenchman, who claimed -the post as his own, and who hired a number of Indians to make war on -Mr. Morris, and at last the post had to be abandoned. - -“I shall go and re-establish myself in the west,” said James Morris, to -his son and to his other relatives, and soon he set forth with a -pack-train, as related in the fourth volume of this series, called “On -the Trail of Pontiac.” Dave and Henry went with him, and after a number -of more or less thrilling adventures, the site of the post was reached. -The place had been burned down, and the forest for a long distance -around was a mass of blackened tree-stumps. Seeing this, the party -journeyed further, presently reaching the Ohio, where a new post was -established and held, despite the warlike attitude of Pontiac and many -other Indian chiefs. Once the trader and his men had to retreat to Fort -Pitt (formerly Fort Duquesne) for protection. A fierce fight was had -with the enemy under Jean Bevoir, the rascally French trader who had -caused the Morrises so much trouble, and nearly all of the enemy were -killed, Bevoir himself being wounded both in the arm and the side. - -Pontiac’s first conspiracy against the English had come to naught, but -the wily Indian leader was not dismayed, and soon he plotted to fall -upon many of the settlements simultaneously. What this led to has been -related in detail in the fifth volume of this series, entitled “The Fort -in the Wilderness,” Fort Detroit was besieged and likewise Fort Pitt and -many other points of lesser importance, and had it not been for the -advance of an English army from the east, with victories at Bushy Run -and other points, there is no doubt but that the massacre of the -settlers would have been appalling. As it was, James Morris had to -abandon his new trading post, and he and Henry, with some others, -reached Fort Pitt only after a desperate struggle to escape the red men. - -Dave, during this trouble, was at the home near Will’s Creek. Here the -effects of the uprising were also felt. White Buffalo, the ever-faithful -friend, brought word to the Morrises, and they took their flight to Fort -Cumberland just in the nick of time. - -During a previous winter, when the snow lay deep upon the ground, the -old frontiersman, Sam Barringford, had made a curious discovery. Wrapped -in a bundle swinging from a tree he had found two boy babies, evidently -twins. He had carried the twins to the Morris cabin, where Mrs. Morris -had taken care of the babes, who, later on, were named Tom and Artie. -Barringford learned through White Buffalo that a Frenchman at Detroit -knew something about the twins and he determined to visit the fort, -taking Dave with him. The trip brought to light little that was new, but -the old frontiersman and the young soldier saw how Fort Detroit was -besieged and had much trouble in getting away. Then, in company with -Rodney Morris, the two joined the English army marching westward to -relieve Fort Pitt. After the battle of Bushy Run Dave was made a -prisoner by some Indians under Moon Eye and taken to a village, where, -to his surprise, he also found the twins and Nell, they having been -stolen some time previous. Watching his chances, the young soldier -managed to escape in a canoe during a violent storm, taking the little -twins and his cousin with him. Later he was aided by White Buffalo, and -though the Indians under Moon Eye did their best to retake their -captives, they were soon halted by James Morris, Rodney, Barringford, -Henry, and some of the English regulars, and were forced to leave that -section of the country. Dave continued on his way to Fort Pitt with his -relatives and friends; and there the whole party rested for the time -being. In the meantime word was received from the east that matters had -quieted down around Will’s Creek, so that Joseph Morris and his wife -could return to the old homestead, for which those at the fort were -thankful. - -“I’d like to be back home myself,” said Rodney. In years gone by he had -been almost a cripple and the campaign against the Indians had told -greatly upon him. - -“I think you had better start before long,” his uncle had answered. -“Your father will need you, and besides Nell and the twins must get -back.” - -While at Fort Pitt the Morrises and Sam Barringford had come in contact -with Benoit Vascal, the Frenchman who knew something about the twins. -They thought Vascal had stolen the children from their parents, but the -Frenchman laid the blame on one Paul Camont, who had been killed by the -wolves at the spot where Tom and Artie were found. Benoit Vascal said -the children belonged to a Mr. Maurice Hamilton, a gentleman who had -visited America to look up some land claims. It was said that Mr. -Hamilton had returned to London almost a year before. A letter was sent -to England, but in those days it took a long time to cross the ocean, -and so far no answer had been received. It had been decided to keep -Benoit Vascal a prisoner at Fort Pitt, but the wily Frenchman slipped -away and left for parts unknown. - - - - - CHAPTER II - A BUFFALO AND A BEAR - - -Two weeks had passed quietly at Fort Pitt when Dave suggested to Henry -that they go out on a hunt for large game. In the meantime it was -arranged that Rodney, Sam Barringford, and a number of others should -journey to the east, taking little Nell and the twins with them. The -start was to be made on the following Monday, and this was Thursday. - -“You must be very careful,” said Mr. Morris, when the two young hunters -set out on their quest for big game. “Run no needless chances, and if -you see any unfriendly Indians lose no time in returning to this fort.” - -It was the middle of September—a clear, cool day, with a faint breeze -blowing from the northward. Dave and Henry had set out directly after -breakfast, each armed with his long flint-lock musket and his day’s -rations. Both wore their old army uniforms, which were much the worse -for the hard usage received. But, as Dave remarked, anything was good -enough for the forest, where nobody was likely to see them. - -Three hours of tramping had brought them to a small body of water, -called by the Indians Lake Kashaka. Here, drifting about, they came -across an Indian canoe containing two good paddles. Without hesitation -they entered the canoe and crossed the lake, where they came upon the -track of several deer. They were deliberating upon whether to follow the -trail or not when Henry chanced to look up the lake and see a buffalo -near some rocks. The animal was gazing at them with lifted head, and -almost instantly ran from sight behind some bushes. - -“There’s our meat!” cried Henry, and dashed back to the canoe. Then he -told of what he had seen, and the boys made after the game, as already -described. Buffaloes were not so plentiful in this section of the -country as they had been previous to the coming of the English and -French hunters, and the idea of bringing down so much good meat at a -single shooting filled the youths with keen enthusiasm. - -It took the two young hunters but a few minutes to reach the spot where -Henry had seen the buffalo. The game was not in sight, but the marks of -his hoofs were plainly to be seen and some young and tender bushes -showed where he had been browsing. - -“’Tis only a question of how far he had traveled,” said Henry, who had -always been considered the best hunter among the Morris boys. “It may be -only a quarter of a mile, and then again it may be six or eight miles.” - -“Let us follow the trail, at least for awhile,” answered Dave. “It is -plain enough. He must be a pretty heavy fellow, by the depth of the -marks he has left.” - -“I imagine all full-grown buffaloes are rather heavy,” answered Henry. -“Come on, and do not make any more noise than is necessary. We don’t -want him to get scared again—if he is within hearing.” - -The trail of the buffalo led up a small hill and then down into a bit of -meadow, where the grass was thick and damp. As the youths progressed a -flock of birds started up directly in front of them and presently they -caught sight of three fair-sized rabbits. - -“Now just look at that!” cried Dave, in vexed tones. “They seem to know -that we are afraid to shoot at them, for fear of disturbing the bigger -game.” - -“Puts me in mind of what Ira Sanderson once said,” returned his cousin -with a grin. “He argued that a fellow always saw the best game when he -was out without his shooting-iron.” - -“I reckon he was right, Henry; I’ve seen some fine deer when I didn’t -have anything to shoot with.” - -The two young hunters now relapsed into silence, as the meadow came to -an end and they entered the forest. Here there was a buffalo trail well -defined, having been used by the animals for many years. The trail in -general was old, but the fresh hoofmarks of the single animal that had -just passed were easily followed by Henry, who was as good on a trail as -the average Indian. - -The forest was a primeval one, with great trees stretching their -branches in all directions. Monstrous roots lay sprawled over the trail, -and they had to watch out that one or the other did not take a tumble. -The air was filled with the songs and cries of birds, while here and -there they heard the steady tap-tap of the woodpecker at his work. They -could have brought down a dozen squirrels had they felt so inclined, and -not a few chipmunks also showed themselves. - -“That buffalo must have gone quite a way,” remarked Henry, as they came -to a halt in the midst of a forest glade. “We have already covered a -good mile and a half.” - -“Don’t give up yet,” pleaded Dave, who had set his heart on returning to -Fort Pitt with the news of laying low the bison. - -“Oh, I’m willing enough to go on, Dave. But we have got to leave the -regular trail now.” - -“Where is the new trail?” - -“Over yonder,” and Henry pointed with his hand. - -“It seems to me he left the regular trail rather suddenly,” remarked -Dave, walking over to the spot indicated. “Don’t you think so?” - -“I do.” - -“What for?” - -“I don’t know, excepting that something must have scared him—some -rabbits in the brush, or something like that.” - -Once more the two young hunters pushed forward, the trail now leading -among some rocks, where walking was anything but agreeable. In some -places there were sharp brambles which scratched them not a little. - -“Henry, that buffalo didn’t come this way for nothing,” whispered Dave. - -“Just what I think. He was scared, and scared good and proper too. I -wish I knew what did it.” - -“Can there be any other hunters around here?” - -“That isn’t impossible. A number of the men who were at the fort have -gone away in the last few days. Some of them may be in this vicinity.” - -“If they are I trust we shoot that buffalo first.” - -They now reached another rise of ground, beyond which was a depression -encircled by bushes and rocks. As they mounted the rise they heard a -peculiar snort. - -“Listen!” whispered Henry, and held up his hand. - -“It’s the buffalo!” answered his cousin. “And hark! Some other animal is -there!” - -“I think I know what it is, Dave. Be careful now and don’t make any more -noise.” - -Guns to the front, they crawled up the rise and peered through the -fringe of brushwood. A sight met their gaze that thrilled them to the -heart. - -The buffalo was there, heavy-set and shaggy as to head and shoulders, -and with a look of fierceness in his staring eyes. He was crouched -beside a rock, and directly in front of him was a small she-bear, -standing on her hind legs, and with her jaws dripping with blood. Behind -the bear were two half-grown cubs, both whining because of wounds in -their sides. - -To Henry’s practiced eye the scene told its own story. In leaping over -the rise of ground the buffalo had come close to the den of the bear and -had stepped on both of the cubs, who were probably playing around at the -time. This had aroused the ire of the mother bear, and she had sprung to -the rescue and bitten the buffalo in the flank. The big beast, unable to -proceed on his flight, had turned around and struck the bear in the -side. Then both had separated, and were now getting ready to renew the -contest between them. - -[Illustration: Both had separated, and were now getting ready to renew -the contest.—_Page 15._] - -The mother bear now uttered a peculiar sound, and at this the cubs -retreated to a hole under some rocks, which was their home. The next -instant the buffalo charged once more, hitting the bear squarely on the -head and knocking her over. But as she tumbled, she caught her enemy by -the neck and sank her teeth deeply into the buffalo’s throat. - -“What a fight!” whispered Dave. “What shall we do?” - -“Wait—but be ready to shoot,” answered Henry. “I think the buffalo will -try to run for it in another minute.” - -There was a snarl and a snort, and the buffalo did his best to throw the -bear off. But the latter clung fast, in the meantime clawing rapidly -with her hind feet at the bison’s forequarter. Then the buffalo swung -around, knocking the smaller beast against the rocks with such force -that the two young hunters heard the ribs of the bear crack. She fell to -the ground and the buffalo struck at her repeatedly with his hoofs. - -“It’s all over with the bear,” whispered Dave. “Hadn’t we better shoot -at the buffalo?” - -Before Henry could reply, the bison swung around once more and made a -leap which, for the instant, took him out of sight of both youths. His -instinct told him of more danger in that vicinity, and he sprang up on -some rocks to get a better look around. This movement brought him face -to face with Dave and Henry. - -Crack! It was the report of Henry’s gun, and the bullet hit the bison on -the side of the head, not far from the left eye. But the shot was merely -a glancing one and did little damage. Then Dave fired, hitting the beast -in the fleshy part of the neck. - -The fight with the bear had left the buffalo in anything but a good -humor and the two shots from the young hunters only added to his -ugliness. He paused to glare at the pair and then made a savage leap -towards Henry, lowering his horns as he did so. - -“Look out!” screamed Dave, and Henry sprang to one side. The movement -was so quick that he could not calculate on where he was going and he -slipped into a hollow, his right foot going down between two heavy -stones in such a fashion that his ankle was badly wrenched. - -The buffalo now turned upon Dave and he too leaped away. With unloaded -gun he could do nothing, and as quickly as possible he started to put in -a fresh charge and fix the priming. In the meantime the buffalo swung -around once more, gave Henry and the bear another look, and then sprang -for the brushwood and was out of sight in a twinkling. - - - - - CHAPTER III - DAVE AND THE INDIAN - - -“He has gone!” - -“Shoot him, Dave, shoot him!” - -With frantic haste Dave fixed the priming of his flint-lock musket. But -long before the weapon was ready for use the buffalo was out of sight -and hearing. - -On the ground in the hollow lay the she-bear, giving a last convulsive -shudder. At the mouth of her den were the two cubs, whining plaintively, -as if they understood that something had gone wrong. Henry sat on one of -the rocks, with his foot still caught fast and a look of pain on his -face. - -“What’s the matter? Did the buffalo hit you?” called out his cousin, -after he had looked to make certain that the bear could do no further -harm. - -“No, but I—I hurt my ankle,” panted Henry. He gave his leg a pull. “Oh! -But that hurts!” - -“The bear is out of it,” said Dave. He came closer. “Hullo, your foot is -caught. Let me help you. I reckon we have seen the last of that -buffalo.” - -“I don’t know about that, Dave. We both hit him, and the bear gave him -something to remember her by.” - -“Poor beast! She certainly did what she could for her cubs. Just look at -them now!” - -It was an affecting sight. The mother bear had passed away and both of -the cubs had crawled forth from the den and were licking her face and -pushing her form with their little noses. Then both began to whine once -more. Neither seemed to think of running away. - -Dave set down his gun and helped Henry to release his caught foot. Then -they took off the legging and the shoe. The ankle had begun to swell and -there was a deep scratch on one side. - -“Can you step on it?” asked Dave, and his cousin tried to do so. He -caught his breath and gave a gasp. - -“Like pins and needles going through my leg!” he announced. “Oh, what -luck! And we didn’t get the buffalo after all!” he added, ruefully. - -The bear cubs now came up and one made a snap at Dave’s foot while the -other took up Henry’s shoe and began to chew it. Seeing this, Dave drew -his hunting knife and dispatched them both. Then he turned again to his -cousin. - -“I suppose it is out of the question for you to think of walking,” he -said. - -“Not just yet,” answered Henry. “Maybe I’ll be able to do it in an hour -or two.” - -“Then we may as well rest right here. One comfort, we have the bear and -her cubs even if we didn’t get the buffalo.” - -“Dave, why don’t you follow the trail again? That buffalo may not be far -off. It won’t do any good for you to sit down here by me—I can take care -of myself. Only be careful that the beast doesn’t corner you.” - -“I’ll do it. But I’ll get you some water first,” answered Dave. - -He had noted a spring just before coming to the bear hollow, and he -walked back to it and procured some water in a gourd they carried for -that purpose. With this Henry started to bathe his swollen ankle, while -Dave took to the fresh trail the buffalo had made. - -“Don’t stay away more than an hour!” called out Henry after him. - -“Not unless it takes a little longer to get a good chance at the -buffalo,” replied his cousin. - -The buffalo had crashed through a long stretch of brushwood where the -trail could be followed with ease. Then he had taken to the old trail -once more, at a point a good half-mile from where he had before left it. - -“He is bound for the west, that’s certain,” said Dave to himself. “And -more than likely he will keep on until sundown. I may as well give up -all hopes of bringing him down. Heigh-ho! such are the fortunes of -hunting!” And he heaved a deep sigh. - -He kept on for quarter of a mile further, reaching a point where the -trail crossed a small but clear stream of spring water. Here the bison -had paused for a drink, and resting his gun against a tree, the young -hunter got down on his hands and knees to do likewise. - -The water tasted so good that Dave took his time and drank his fill. -Then he raised his head, started to rise, and looked toward the tree -where he had placed his weapon. - -The gun was gone! - -For the moment the young hunter could not believe the evidence of his -senses. He remained in a crouching position, wondering what he had best -do. He felt that an enemy must have taken the gun, and wondered who it -could be. With caution he looked around, but not a soul was in sight. - -It was a peculiar position to be in, and small wonder that the cold -perspiration stood out upon the young hunter’s forehead. He had been in -peril before, among the Indians, and felt fairly certain that a red man -had gotten the better of him. - -What was best to do? He asked himself the question several times, his -heart beating meanwhile like a trip-hammer within his breast. An enemy -was surely at hand. What would be the next movement of the unknown? - -Cautiously he put his hand to his side, drew his hunting knife, and -arose slowly to an upright position. Overhead the branches of the trees -were tightly interlaced, making the spot rather gloomy. The stream came -down between a number of rocks which were backed up by bushes and trees. -Would it be best to make a dash for this shelter? - -“White boy drop knife!” - -The unexpected command, issued in a guttural tone, came from a clump of -brushwood behind Dave. The young hunter swung around, but could see no -one. - -“White boy drop knife, or Indian shoot,” were the next words spoken, and -now Dave saw the barrel of his own gun pointed at his breast. - -“Who are you?” he asked. - -“White boy drop knife, or shoot him sure!” was the only answer, and now -the muzzle of the gun was shoved a little closer to the youth’s breast. -Looking through the brushwood, Dave made out the repulsive features of a -savage and saw the wicked gleam of his black eyes. - -There seemed to be no help for it, and the hunting knife dropped to the -ground. The Indian gave a grunt of satisfaction and then stepped into -the opening, still, however, keeping the gun levelled at Dave’s breast. -He was a brawny warrior of the Senecas, arrayed in his war-paint and -feathers, and he carried a tomahawk and a knife in his girdle and a bow -with arrows across his shoulders. - -“Where white boy come from?” he asked, abruptly. - -“I came from Fort Pitt,” answered Dave. “Why did you steal my gun?” - -At the last question the red man gave a grunt that might mean anything. -He looked Dave over with care and made him back away, so that he could -secure the lad’s hunting knife, which he placed beside his own. - -“White boy sodger, um?” went on the savage, noting the tattered uniform. - -“Yes, I have been a soldier,” answered Dave. He continued to gaze at the -savage. “I’ve seen you before. Oh, I remember now. You were with Moon -Eye, right after I was captured. You had something to do with the -stealing of my little cousin and the twin boys.” - -The red man’s eyes flashed, but he did not answer to this. Evidently he -was pondering upon what to do next. He had come upon Dave quite -unexpectedly and had taken the gun on the impulse of the moment. - -“White boy alone?” he asked, after an awkward pause. - -“No, I have a good many friends around here,” was Dave’s quick reply, -but he did not add that the majority of his friends were at the fort. - -At this the face of the warrior darkened. He allowed the gun barrel to -drop and drew his tomahawk. If others of the whites were near he thought -it might be best to brain Dave on the spot, making as little noise as -possible, and then get away from that vicinity. - -The young hunter understood the movement, and his heart leaped into his -throat. He had no desire to feel the edge of the savage’s stone hatchet. -As the gun barrel dropped still lower he thought of the rocks and the -brushwood and made a spring towards them. - -“_Pawah!_” cried the Indian, in a rage. “White boy stop!” And he made a -dash after the youth. But as luck would have it one moccasin caught in a -trailing vine and he pitched headlong. As he went down, the trigger of -the gun struck some brush, caught fast, and the piece went off with a -loud report. - -Dave imagined the gun was discharged at himself, and fully expected to -feel the sting of the bullet, perhaps in some vital portion of his body. -He felt himself making a silent prayer, and as the sting did not come -realized that as yet he was unharmed. He cleared the rocks at another -bound, almost fell into the bushes, and ran on and on with all the speed -he could command. - -Dave covered a good quarter of a mile before he thought of coming to a -halt. He was now in the very depths of the great forest, with a heavy -growth of timber on all sides of him. The way had been rough and he had -stumbled twice, scratching his hand and his knee so that they smarted -greatly. He was far away from the buffalo trail and also away from the -stream where he had stopped for a drink. He had made a number of turns -while running, and could not tell in what direction he had left either -the red warrior or Henry. - -“Here’s a fine kettle of fish!” he muttered, as he stopped to catch his -breath. “Everything is going wrong to-day. First we lost the buffalo, -then Henry sprained his ankle, and now here am I, trying to get away -from a redskin who wants to take my life and who has robbed me of my -rifle and hunting knife! I wonder what will happen next?” - -He listened intently, but could hear nothing of his red foe, nor could -he see anything to alarm him. It was more gloomy than ever under the -trees, the sun having gone under a cloud. The breeze sighed mournfully -through the tallest branches, and only the occasional note of a bird, or -the distant bark of a fox, broke the stillness. - -Dave did not dare to linger long in one spot, fearing that the Indian -might be sneaking over his trail with the slyness of a fox. He pushed -forward, hoping to come to a series of rocks, or a deep stream, where -the trail might be hidden. - -His search was at last rewarded. Some flat rocks appeared, forming -something of a cliff. He walked over these, taking care to avoid every -accumulation of dirt or trailing vines. Then, coming to the end of the -stones, he leaped down into a gully, where flowed a stream of water -several feet wide and more than a foot deep. He followed this stream a -long distance, until it was lost among some rugged rocks, where his -further progress appeared to be barred. - -“There—I don’t think that Indian can follow me to here,” he told -himself. “The question is, How am I to get back to Henry without being -discovered, and how are we both to get back to the fort?” - - - - - CHAPTER IV - TAKEN BY SURPRISE - - -Dave’s hasty flight had tired him out, and he was glad enough to sit -down upon one of the rocks and rest. The cloudiness in the sky had -continued, and it looked as if there might be a shower before nightfall. - -The young hunter was in anything but a cheerful frame of mind, and would -have given a good deal to have been back at the fort once more. He was -worried also about his cousin, and trusted that Henry would not fall -into the hands of the Indian. - -At last, having gotten back his breath, he resolved to start off once -more and see if he could not locate the spot where he had left his -cousin. He walked through the forest with extreme caution, often coming -to a halt, to survey the surroundings and make sure that the enemy was -nowhere near. - -Thus a full hour more was consumed, and he knew that Henry would now be -growing exceedingly anxious concerning his prolonged absence. - -“I hope he doesn’t try to follow me up,” said Dave to himself. “If he -does it’s more than likely that redskin will see him.” - -At length, after moving in several directions, the young hunter came to -a spot that looked slightly familiar to him. He made a circle of the -point, and finally recognized it as the very spot he had come to with -White Buffalo when he and the Indian were on the way to the fort with -little Nell and the twins. - -“Well, I never thought I’d see this place again!” he murmured, half -aloud. “I wish I had White Buffalo with me now. I’d feel a heap safer -than I do.” - -He now knew how to reach the fort, and resolved to follow that course -until he should come to the point where the trail crossed that which he -and Henry had taken after leaving the lake to go after the buffalo. Then -he would follow up the buffalo trail to where his cousin had been left. - -He tramped on and on, growing bolder as he saw nothing more of his red -enemy. It was well past noon, and he munched some of the rations in his -game bag, washing down the hasty meal with more water from a brook. - -He was almost up to the spot where the fight between the buffalo and the -bear had occurred when he suddenly heard the murmur of voices, -conversing in the Indian language. Looking to one side of the clearing, -he made out four Indians, one of whom was the fellow who had deprived -him of his rifle and hunting knife. - -The discovery came as a shock to Dave, and once again his heart sank -within him. He had presence of mind enough to leap behind some bushes, -and a moment later the red men passed within three yards of him. Then he -heard a cry from the Indians, followed by an exclamation from Henry. - -“They have found him!” thought Dave, and he was right. The four red men -came upon poor Henry just as he was putting on his shoe, preparatory to -looking for his cousin. One leaped forward, pinning the young hunter to -the rocks, and in a twinkling the four had made him a prisoner and -disarmed him. - -“What does this mean?” demanded Henry, although he knew only too well. -“Let up, I say!” But the Indians paid no attention. One carried a length -of rawhide and with this they bound the young hunter’s hands behind him. -Then his pockets were searched, and they took from him the three -shillings and sixpence he happened to be carrying. - -After the capture, the four Indians held a consultation among -themselves. It was in their native tongue, so that Henry could -understand next to nothing. - -“White boy come with Indians,” said the red man who could speak English. -He had joined his brother warriors after giving up the chase after Dave. - -At that moment Henry caught sight of the extra hunting knife and the -rifle he knew only too well. - -“Dave’s gun and Dave’s knife!” he cried. “What have you done with him?” -he asked, with a sinking heart. - -The Indian would not answer this question, but drew up his eyes in a -peculiar fashion that caused Henry to shiver. He concluded that Dave -must have been killed, although he noted with just a grain of hope that -none of the warriors carried his cousin’s scalp. - -Despite the fact that his ankle hurt him a good deal, Henry was forced -to march along with the Indians, who prodded him now and then with the -points of their hunting knives to make him move along faster. The course -was to the northwest, to a stream known to the red men as the -Mustalonack, where a small band had taken up their secret abode since -the disastrous battle of Bushy Run. - -After what was to Henry a painful walk lasting an hour, the Mustalonack -was reached, and from the bushes along the bank the Indians drew a long -canoe. They made Henry enter and then got in themselves and shoved off. -The course was up the stream, and two used the paddles. As the current -was rather swift, the progress of the craft was necessarily slow. - -In moving towards the river the Indians had been on the alert for the -possible appearance of white hunters or English soldiers. They knew that -to stay in that neighborhood was dangerous, and they expected in a few -days to move much further to the westward, perhaps even as far as the -Mississippi. They were awaiting orders from their chief, who, in turn, -was hoping every day to receive some wampum, or speech belt, from -Pontiac. - -But though the red warriors were on the alert, their eyes were not sharp -enough to catch sight of Dave, as he followed them at a safe distance. -Although unarmed, the young hunter could not bear to think of leaving -his cousin to his fate, and so he kept the party in front in sight, -hoping that sooner or later he would be able to render Henry some -assistance. - -When the Indians set off in the canoe, Dave was for the moment -nonplussed, not knowing how to follow them. But when he saw how slowly -the craft moved, he took courage, and walking through the forest along -the shore, managed, although not without an effort, to keep them in -sight until they had journeyed as far as they wished, when he saw them -land on the opposite shore, pull the long canoe into the bushes, and -hurry once more into the forest. - -To some faint-hearted persons this might have meant the end of the -pursuit, but Dave was made of sterner stuff, and besides he loved his -cousin too dearly to give up the hope of a rescue thus readily. He saw -that the stream at this point was rather shallow, and without hesitation -pulled off his shoes and stockings, rolled up his breeches, and waded -in. - -Fording the stream was not as easy as it looked, and more than once Dave -was in danger of slipping down on the loose rocks or of having the -current carry him off his feet. But he managed to reach the opposite -shore of the stream in safety, and there, donning his stockings and -shoes again, hurried on after the red men as before. - -Dave had not gone very far when he saw the unmistakable signs of an -Indian village. He slackened his pace and soon saw a lean and -hungry-looking Indian dog coming toward him. The canine began to bark -viciously and showed his teeth. - -Here it was that the young hunter’s nerve again showed itself. He was -well acquainted with the general worthlessness of the Indian curs—dogs -that were not to be compared with the hunting and watch animals of the -English—and picking up a sharp stone he let drive, taking the canine in -the side. The dog gave a sharp yelp, turned and fled, and that was the -last Dave saw of the animal. - -In the meantime the Indians had arrived at their temporary village, -located in a dense portion of the forest, and consisting of nothing more -than half a dozen dirty shelters of blankets and skins. In the center -was a small clearing where a campfire smoldered, and around this lolled -half a dozen Indians, while not far off were several squaws and a dozen -dirty and half-clad Indian children. - -The coming of the four warriors with their captive produced a mild -sensation, and there was a running fire of questions and answers in the -native dialect, lasting some time. In the meanwhile two of the warriors -bound Henry to a tree near the largest of the wigwams, and left him, for -the time being, to take care of himself. - -The head of the tribe, Moon Eye, was away, and was not expected back -until the next day at noon. This being so, the Indians decided to keep -Henry where he was. He was given nothing to eat, and when he asked for a -drink he was handed some dirty water that even a dog would have refused. - -“What do you want of me?” Henry asked, of the Indian who could speak -English. - -“White boy wait and he shall see,” answered the warrior. - -“Did you kill my cousin—the one who owns that rifle and the hunting -knife?” - -“White boy must not ask so many questions.” - -“If you don’t let me go you’ll get into trouble,” went on Henry, -thinking he might scare the Indians into releasing him. “See how you -have already suffered. The English have many soldiers—they can do the -red men great harm.” - -“The French have many soldiers also,” answered the warrior. “Soon their -army will come to the aid of Pontiac and his followers.” - -This was a story that had often been told to the red men by the French -traders, and many of the Indians believed it. But they waited in vain -for help from France, or from Canada. Instead of sending help, the king -of France sold his holding along the Mississippi to Spain, so that the -Indians were worse off than ever. - -As night came on it began to rain gently, while a heavy mist filled the -air. The Indians did not like this at all, and after huddling around the -campfire for awhile the majority of them crawled into the wigwams and -went to sleep. Two of them visited Henry, binding him more securely to -the tree than ever, so that to break or slip his bonds was entirely out -of the question. - -“White boy sleep good,” said one of them, as a joke, and then both -stalked over to the fire once more. But the rain and the mist were not -to their liking and presently they, too, retired. Then the fire died -down gradually, and the Indian village became as quiet as a graveyard. - - - - - CHAPTER V - THE FLIGHT TO THE RIVER - - -“Henry!” - -“Dave! How did you manage——” - -“Hush! Don’t make any noise, or the Indians may hear you. Stand still -until I untie the ropes. They took my knife away from me.” - -No more was said just then. Henry’s heart gave a great bound of joy. -Dave was alive and well, after all. The discovery was almost too good to -be true. - -With dextrous fingers Dave undid the rawhide which held his cousin a -prisoner. Henry was so stiff that he staggered, and Dave had to support -him for the moment. - -“Come with me to the river—we can take to the canoe,” whispered Dave -into his cousin’s ear. He was fearful that one of the Indians might -awaken at any moment and stop their flight. - -“All right, Dave, but——” Henry hesitated, and tried to look through the -darkness and the rain. “Are you armed?” - -“No.” - -“Neither am I—they took everything I had. We ought to try to get at -least one rifle and a knife.” - -“Yes, but the risk?” - -“Is the canoe ready for use?” - -“Yes,—all we have to do is to jump in and shove off.” - -“Then keep still until I take a look around. At the first sign of an -alarm make for the canoe as tight as you can.” - -Henry’s wrenched ankle still pained him, but in the excitement of the -occasion he paid no attention to the injury. With the wiliness of the -red warriors he was trying to outwit, he crawled forward in the darkness -until he was close to one of the wigwams. This he knew held several -Indians and also his own weapons and those belonging to Dave. - -With bated breath the young hunter raised the dirty flap to the wigwam -and tried to pierce the darkness inside. He could see next to nothing. -He crawled in a little further, and his hand came in contact with an -Indian’s foot. He felt further, and touched the barrel of a gun. He -raised the weapon and drew it towards him. One of the red men gave a -deep sigh and a grunt, but did not awaken. - -Encouraged by his success so far, Henry crawled forward again and this -time obtained the second rifle, the powder horns, and also one of the -hunting knives. His eyes were now becoming accustomed to the darkness, -and finding a tomahawk he took that too, and then a bow and a quiver -full of arrows. - -At that instant one of the Indians turned over, muttering in his sleep. -Fearful that he was awakening, the young hunter made a hasty move toward -the wigwam opening. He stepped on the foot of a sleeping warrior, and -the red man sat up with a start and called out in his native tongue, -demanding to know what was the matter. Then, as he saw Henry dart from -the shelter, he gave a war-cry that alarmed the entire camp. - -“Lead the way to the canoe, Dave!” cried Henry. “And here, take one of -these rifles. If they press us too closely, fire!” - -Dave took the weapon handed to him, and side by side they rushed toward -the river. Hardly had they gained the shelter of the forest when the red -warriors were in full pursuit. One caught up a dying brand from the -fire, and swinging it in a circle soon had it burning brightly for a -torch. - -Fortunately for the two young hunters, Dave had noted the trail to the -river with care, so that he did not get mixed up, even though it was -dark and misty. But Henry could not run very fast on account of his lame -ankle. - -“I’m glad we are to—to go by way of the—the river,” he gasped. “I—I -can’t run much further!” - -The Indians were yelling wildly, and one of them let fly an arrow which -whizzed through the bushes at their side. Dave caught his cousin by the -arm, to aid him, and an instant later another arrow flew directly -between their heads. - -“They must see us, Henry. Come, can’t you run just a bit faster?” - -“I’ll—I’ll try,” gasped Henry, and gritted his teeth, so great was the -pain in his ankle. - -The forest now came to an end, but luckily for the youths the river was -bordered with thick brushwood. Into this they dove, and in half a minute -more reached the point where Dave had left the canoe in readiness for -immediate flight. - -“It’s gone!” cried the young hunter, in dismay. - -“The canoe?” queried his cousin. - -“Yes, I left it right here.” - -“Then we are lost!” - -Sick at heart, they caught each other by the arm and listened. The -Indians were close at hand. What was to be done? - -“Let us try to trick them!” whispered Dave, and caught up a stone that -was handy. He threw it into the water with a splash, and then threw -another stone after it. This accomplished, he drew Henry into the -bushes, and both made their way down the shore for a good hundred feet, -walking in shallow water to conceal the trail. - -The mist over the water was thicker than in the forest, and when the -Indians came out on the shore they could see little or nothing, even -though they swung the torch in all directions. - -“They leaped into the water,—I heard them,” said one warrior, in the -Indian language. - -“I heard them too,” answered another. “They must be swimming for the -other side.” - -“We’ll get into the canoe and look around,” put in a third. - -They ran to where the long canoe had been left, and then uttered cries -of anger at finding the craft missing. - -“They have taken the canoe!” - -“If that is so we cannot catch them—the mist will hide them from view.” - -“Moon Eye will be angry when he finds his best canoe gone,” grumbled the -Indian who could speak English. “And my bow is gone too!” - -The Indians continued to walk up and down the river bank, looking for -some trace of the two whites. They could not imagine who had come to -Henry’s rescue, but thought it must be somebody from Fort Pitt, and were -much disturbed, thinking that some English soldiers might be in that -vicinity. - -Meanwhile Dave and Henry remained hidden in the bushes, close to the -water’s edge. They caught an occasional flash from the torch, but -otherwise saw nothing of their enemies. The cooling water seemed to -soothe Henry’s ankle greatly, for which the young hunter was grateful. - -“Let us go on a little further,” whispered Henry, after a short rest, -and while the Indians were out of sight and hearing. “The further we get -away, the better.” - -Dave was more than willing, and they moved through the shallow water -until they reached a bend in the river. Then both gave a cry of -satisfaction: - -“The canoe!” - -“It must have drifted to this spot,” said Dave. “See, the paddles are -just as I left them. But I thought the canoe was fast.” - -“Get in and be quick about it,” returned his cousin. - -They entered the craft and shoved out into the stream. The rain had -ceased, but the mist was so thick they could scarcely see two yards in -any direction. Catching up the paddles, they guided the canoe down the -watercourse as best they could. At first they caught a faint glimpse of -the Indians’ torch, but this was quickly swallowed up by the mist and -darkness. - -“I reckon we are out of it,” said Dave, after quarter of an hour had -passed. “And I am glad of it.” He heaved a long sigh of relief. - -“You are not half as glad as I am,” answered his cousin. “I felt pretty -blue when they had me tied to the tree, I can tell you! How ever did you -locate me?” - -“It’s a long story,” answered Dave, and then told of his meeting with -the Indian who could speak English, and of what had happened afterward. - -“We can certainly count ourselves more than lucky,” said Henry. “In nine -cases out of ten those redskins would have killed us on the spot, and -scalped us in the bargain. They are terribly bitter because Pontiac’s -last conspiracy failed.” - -“I think I know why they let you live, Henry. They wanted to learn how -matters stood at the fort. They’d make you tell everything, even if they -had to torture you into doing it.” - -“I reckon you are right on that point.” - -Feeling themselves safe for the time being, the two young hunters -stopped paddling and tried to gaze around them. Nothing could be seen -but the mist and water, the latter rushing along with increased -swiftness. - -“Did they have another canoe?” asked Henry, presently. - -“I couldn’t find any, and I looked pretty carefully.” - -“In that case, they won’t be able to follow us very readily.” - -“They won’t know where to look for us, in this darkness, Henry. The -question is, where are we going? I know nothing of this river, do you?” - -“I do not, but I imagine it flows into the Allegheny or the Ohio.” - -“If it will take us to the fort, that is just where we want to go.” - -They talked the matter over, and decided to keep on the river at least -for a few miles further. Then they would go ashore, make themselves as -comfortable as possible, and wait for daylight to appear. - -“If the sun comes out we can climb a tall tree and get the lay of the -land,” said Dave. “Or, I can climb it alone, since your ankle is hurt. -How does it feel now?” - -“No worse,” answered his cousin. “I think if I can keep off it for a few -hours it will be all right again. But it was a pretty bad twist.” - -“Do you notice that the river seems to be growing narrower?” said Dave, -after a short spell of silence. - -“I have been wondering if we are not on some branch,” was the reply. -“Anyway, it is flowing much swifter than before.” - -“Maybe we had better turn into shore now.” - -“I think so myself. We don’t want to run into anything.” - -They started to turn the canoe around. To their surprise the water began -to boil and foam on all sides of them. Then came a grating sound from -the bottom. - -“We just ran over a rock!” cried Dave. “Henry, this is getting -dangerous!” - -“I think so myself, Dave. Come, we will make for the shore over yonder. -Perhaps—— Oh!” - -Henry’s remarks came to a sudden ending, as the canoe swept swiftly -under the low-hanging branch of a big tree. The young hunter was -standing up at the time, and he was carried overboard in a flash, paddle -in hand. Then the canoe struck a rock, slid up along some tree-roots, -and began to fill with water! - - - - - CHAPTER VI - BACK TO THE FORT - - -Henry was so taken by surprise that it was not until he found himself -over his head in the river he realized what had occurred. His shoulder -struck a rock, but the blow was of small moment. He came up, spluttering -and still holding the paddle. - -“Whe—where are you, Dave?” was his first question, as he dashed the -water from his eyes. - -There was no answer, and in the mist and darkness he could see nothing. -He struck out, and soon reached a spot where he could stand on the rocky -bottom of the watercourse. He was under some tree-limbs, and knew that -the shore must be close at hand. - -“I say, Dave!” he called again. “Dave!” - -“Henry!” was the feeble reply. - -The voice was sufficient for Henry to locate the canoe, and he hastened -toward it. Feeling around in the utter darkness he caught hold of his -cousin’s knee and then his arm. - -“What’s the matter? Are you hurt?” - -“I—I don’t know,” faltered Dave. “A tree-limb struck me on the head.” He -put up his hand. “Phew! I’ve got a lump on my forehead like a walnut!” - -Henry could feel that the canoe was filling with water, and so lifted up -the guns and the powder and bullet horns. Dave was slowly recovering -from the shock received. Both stood up and leaned against a thick limb -above the canoe. - -“Let us follow the limb to shore,” said Henry, and this was done, they -taking everything that had been in the canoe with them. - -Among the jagged rocks the water swirled swiftly, and they had to pick -their way with care. Close to the tree-trunk was a deep hole, and they -had to circle this. At last they stood on the shore, where the rocks -were backed up by brushwood and tall timber. - -“I fancy the canoe is done for,” announced Dave. “It went up on those -rocks good and hard.” - -“Well, let us be thankful that it carried us as far as it did,” answered -Henry, trying to be cheerful. “We must be four or five miles from that -Indian camp.” - -“You are wet to the skin, Henry. You’ll have to dry your clothes or -you’ll take cold.” - -“I’ll wring them out and make that do, Dave. We won’t dare to light a -campfire.” - -“Not if we can find a hollow? The mist will hide a good deal, remember.” - -“Well, we’ll see about it.” - -Henry did not relish remaining in the wet and darkness any more than did -his cousin, and both searched around until they found a spot with high -rocks on two sides and a thick group of trees opposite. To get some dry -wood was the next task, and then came the problem of starting the blaze. -But this was solved by Henry, who poured some loose powder on a dry -rock, mixed it with some tinder, and then hammered the rock with the -ramrod of his gun. Soon came a flash and a hiss, and the tinder glowed, -and presently the fire flared up pleasantly enough. Around it they piled -some flat stones, shutting in the light as much as possible. - -“Do you think we ought to pull in the canoe?” asked Dave. “The Indians -may come along and see it.” - -“It wouldn’t be a bad plan,” answered Henry. - -They soon had the battered craft out of the river. They turned it upside -down, resting each end on a rock, and thus it formed for them something -of a shelter in front of the fire. - -With the brightness of the blaze, matters appeared to take on a more -cheerful turn. Henry took off the most of his garments and dried them, -and Dave did likewise, and the former also cared for his hurt ankle. The -youths calculated that it was about midnight. They did not know where -they were, nor what new dangers might confront them. Each looked to his -firearm, to see that it could be used if necessary, and one kept the -hunting knife and the other the tomahawk in readiness. - -“I think we had better take turns watching,” said Henry. “There is no -use in both keeping awake.” - -He took the first vigil, allowing Dave to sleep until about three -o’clock. Then he turned in for a solid sleep lasting several hours. - -In the morning the mist and the rain cleared away. The day, however, was -still gloomy, and although Dave climbed one of the tall trees at hand, -he could see little or nothing by which to locate himself. - -“I think the fort is in that direction,” he said, pointing with his -hand. “But I am by no means sure.” - -“Well, we may as well journey in that direction as any other,” was -Henry’s reply. “I think you are right. The canoe is not fit for use, so -we cannot go down the river, and may as well throw the paddles away or -burn them up.” - -At early dawn Dave had discovered a squirrel on a branch near by, and -laid the game low with an arrow. This had made him do a little hunting -with the bow, and he had ended by obtaining four squirrels. These, -broiled over the fire, gave them a good breakfast, washed down as it was -by a drink from the river. They looked up the watercourse as far as they -could, but saw no signs of the Indians. - -They were soon on the tramp. Knowing that Henry’s ankle must still pain -him, Dave let his cousin set the pace. This was somewhat slow for the -frontier youths, but would have proved stiff walking for anybody not -used to it. The route was comparatively easy to travel, and by high -noon, when they sat down to rest, they calculated that they had covered -at least eight miles. - -“The sun is breaking through the clouds, and I am going to take another -look around,” said Dave, and this time Henry climbed a tree with him. A -grand panorama of woods, hills, and waters was spread around them, and -at a distance they saw where Fort Pitt was located, at the junction of -the Allegheny and Monongahela rivers. - -“There is the fort!” cried Dave, light-heartedly. “Henry we are almost -on the direct road!” - -“And not an Indian in sight, so far as I can see,” was the answer, as -Henry’s trained eye moved slowly from one direction to another. - -“Let us go on again. I want to get back before night—if it can be done. -But, of course, you’ll have to set the pace,” added Dave, considerately. - -As they journeyed along they talked over the situation, and wondered if -the Indians had taken possession of the dead bear and her cubs. - -“I don’t think they took the whole bear,” said Henry. “Maybe they took -the hide and the choicest of the meat.” - -“I didn’t dare to watch them too closely, for fear of being caught,” -said Dave. - -They took an almost direct course for the fort, and by the middle of the -afternoon calculated that they were but two or three miles away. Nothing -had come to alarm them outside of the appearance of a rattlesnake that -glided from under a rock over which they were stepping. They lost no -time in giving the reptile a wide berth, and on his part the rattlesnake -did not attempt to molest them. - -“I think we’ll reach Fort Pitt by sundown,” said Henry. “We might do it -in less time, but there is no use in hurrying.” - -“Does the ankle still hurt?” - -“It doesn’t hurt very much, but it feels weak. I think I’ll rest all day -to-morrow.” - -“We’ll have earned a rest, I’m thinking,” returned Dave, with a grim -smile. “Won’t they open their eyes at the fort when they hear the story -we have to tell!” - -Another mile was covered, and they had to pass around a hollow filled -with thick brushwood. Henry was in advance, when he came to a sudden -halt. - -“Here is our chance, Dave!” he whispered. “We won’t have to go back -empty-handed.” - -Dave pressed to the front and took a look ahead. There, among the -bushes, was a beautiful doe with a fair-sized fawn beside her. - -“Good!” whispered Dave, raising his rifle. “The best kind of deer meat. -Which will you take, Henry?” - -“I’ll take the doe.” - -“All right, I’ll take the fawn. It’s a pity to kill such a beautiful -creature, but it can’t be helped. We need the meat.” - -Both moved a little closer, to a spot where they could get a better -chance at the doe and her fawn. Just as they raised their rifles the -mother deer looked up and gave a sniff. The fawn followed, and both -started to bound away. - -Bang! bang! Both guns rang out in quick succession. The fawn fell in a -heap in the bushes and lay still. The doe struggled on, mortally wounded -in the breast. But hardly had she gone ten feet, with Henry and Dave -after her, than an old frontiersman stepped from behind a tree, ran up, -and plunged a hunting knife into her throat, bringing her career to an -end. - -“Sam Barringford!” cried Dave and Henry in a breath. - -“Right ye air, boys,” answered the old frontiersman. “I wasn’t quite -quick enough fer ye, was I? Thought as how thet meat war mine fer -sartin.” - -“Were you after the doe and her fawn?” asked Henry. - -“Yes—been a-followin’ ’em fer the last hour. They war in sight o’ the -fort, an’ I thought I’d add to the provender by bringin’ ’em low.” - -“Well, you’ve had your hand in the killing,” said Dave. He examined the -fawn. “There’s meat fit for the table of a king.” - -“Yes, and I wish mother had it,” added Henry. - -Sam Barringford was alone and carried only his long rifle, his horn of -powder and ball, and his hunting knife. As of old he was attired in a -hunting shirt, with leggings, and wore his coonskin cap, with the tail -trailing behind. He was surprised to learn that they had no game with -them, but still more surprised when he heard the tale they had to tell. - -“We’ll want to git back to the fort without delay,” he said. “The -commandant there must know about this.” - -The doe was hung on a long pole, and Dave and Henry carried the game -between them. The fawn Sam Barringford slung across the back of his -neck, with the front hoofs in one hand and the rear hoofs in the other. -Thus they walked as swiftly as possible to the fort, where their coming -was noted from a distance. - -“Not so bad,” said James Morris, as he eyed the game. “But you have made -a long stay of it.” - -“Yes, and we might have had a bear, two cubs, and a buffalo had it not -been for the Indians,” replied Dave. - -“The Indians!” burst out his parent. “Do you mean to say you ran into -the Indians again?” - -“We certainly did,—and I have been a prisoner, too,” said Henry. “I -might be a prisoner yet if it hadn’t been for Dave.” - -“Well, this is certainly news,” said Rodney. “I thought all the Indians -had cleared out.” - -“I said all along they’d be skulkin’ around,” said Sam Barringford. -“Don’t ye remember as how I warned ye to keep your eyes peeled? Some o’ -them redskins ain’t a goin’ to git out until they actually have to, mark -me!” - -The news that Dave and Henry had encountered the Indians quickly spread, -and Captain Ecuyer, who was in charge of the stronghold, sent for them, -that he might learn the details. They knew the captain well, and readily -told him all. - -“I shall have to look into this,” said the commandant of Fort Pitt. “The -Indians must be cleared out of this district entirely.” - - - - - CHAPTER VII - THE START FOR THE EAST - - -The news that the Indians were still in that vicinity alarmed James -Morris exceedingly, and he shook his head sadly when he remembered that -it had been arranged for Rodney to start for the east with little Nell -and the twins on the following Monday. - -“I hardly think it will be safe,” said he, to Rodney. “I should not wish -anything to happen to you and the others.” - -“There are six men to go along, besides Sam Barringford,” answered the -young soldier who had fought so bravely at the battle of Bushy Run. -“There can be only small bodies of Indians around, and they will not -dare to attack us if we keep a good watch.” - -“The Indians may unite for an attack,” said Mr. Morris. “Better wait -until we are certain the way is clear.” And so the start for the Morris -homestead was delayed. - -Dave and Henry had returned to Fort Pitt on Friday night, and Saturday -morning Captain Ecuyer sent out a body of fifty regulars and six -frontiersmen, to scour the vicinity for Indians. With the number went -Sam Barringford and another old hunter, Tony Jadwin, both of whom knew -that territory well. Jadwin had been Mr. Morris’s right-hand man at the -trading post, and was counted an Indian trailer of extraordinary -ability. - -“I’d like to go with them myself,” said Dave, but his father demurred. -Henry was glad enough to give his ankle a rest, and Rodney thought he -had better reserve his strength for the trip eastward. - -“Oh, Henry, please don’t go out among the Indians again!” cried little -Nell, to her brother. “And don’t you go either, Cousin Dave,” she added. - -“We are not going just yet,” said Henry, giving his sister a kiss. - -“Oh, I hate the Indians so!” went on the miss, with a stamp of her foot. - -“Not all Indians,” replied Dave, with a smile. “Don’t forget White -Buffalo.” - -“Oh, he is only an Indian in looks,” answered Nell. “He has a white -man’s heart—Uncle Sam told me so.” - -“By the way, where is White Buffalo?” asked Henry. - -“He has gone to visit his tribe,” answered Rodney. “He thinks the -different factions will unite now and sue for peace. Sir William Johnson -is going to give them all a chance to bury the hatchet, and White -Buffalo thinks it is a grand chance for his tribe to unite once more and -live in peace.” - -What Rodney said about Sir William Johnson was true. The Indian -Superintendent had sent agents to all of the chiefs of the Six Nations, -and also to the chiefs of the tribes along the St. Lawrence and in -Canada. The Indians were to meet the Superintendent at Johnson Hall in -central New York State. Many came to the conference, which began early -in September and was productive of some good, although not a great deal. -The Iroquois were induced to send messages to other tribes in the west, -urging them to bury the hatchet, and they also sent word to the -Delawares telling them not to listen to the western tribes that desired -to plunge them into further bloodshed. The Senecas would not come to the -conference, and they continued to kill and plunder whenever the -opportunity presented itself, and the tribes from along the Mississippi -did likewise. White Buffalo’s tribe of Delawares continued to remain -split, much to the old chief’s sorrow, one part aiding the English, and -another part aiding the Indians, and the French who still held certain -trading posts and refused to give them up. - -The regulars and frontiersmen to sally forth from Fort Pitt after the -enemy, were gone four days. When they returned they announced that -practically all the red men had departed either for the north or the -west. They had encountered one band of fleeing men under Moon Eye and -had slain two of the Indians. One regular had been shot in the arm, a -wound that was painful but not serious. They had come upon the torn -carcass of the bear, which the wolves had used for a feast after the -Indians had cut away the hide and some choice steaks, and had found the -torn body of one cub. Sam Barringford had also gotten a long-distance -shot at a buffalo, probably the one followed by Dave, but the animal had -gotten away from him. - -“I think we can make the trip eastward in safety now,” said Rodney, to -his uncle. “Evidently the redskins are pretty badly scared. It may be -safer to make it now than later on. Besides, we don’t want to wait till -winter is on us.” - -The matter was talked over at great length, and finally it was decided -that the start for the east should be made at the end of a week. Rodney -and Barringford were to go, taking with them Nell and the twins. A -settler named Dobson was also going, along with his wife, who promised -to keep an eye on Nell, Tom, and Artie. The escort was to be composed of -five frontiersmen, and ten regular soldiers who had received their -discharge from the service, and who were anxious to get back to -Annapolis, where they belonged. The party were to take with them six -pack-horses, all belonging to Mr. Morris. - -This plan of departing for the east put Rodney in better spirits, for he -wanted to see home again, not being used to being away, as were Dave and -Henry. Everything was gotten in readiness and long letters were written -by those left at the fort. In his letter to his brother, James Morris -stated that he intended to go back to his trading post on the Ohio as -soon as it seemed fairly safe to do so, and that, as agreed upon before, -he would take Dave and Henry with him. - -“Good-bye, Rodney,” said Dave, when it came time to part. “Take good -care of yourself, and good care of Nell and the twins.” - -“And you take care of yourself,” answered the former cripple. “Don’t -start for the trading post until it is perfectly safe.” - -When the actual parting came Nell’s eyes were full of tears and she -kissed her brother Henry, Uncle James, and Cousin Dave over and over -again. Even the twins hated to leave the fort, where they had been -general favorites since their arrival. - -“Tom wants to stay by the soldiers,” said one. - -“Artie wants to stay by the soldiers, too, and by Dave!” cried the -other. - -They were sturdy little chaps, the picture of health, and Dave and Henry -could not resist giving each a toss and a hug. - -When the little expedition started Dave, Henry, and Mr. Morris -accompanied them for several miles of the journey. Then all reached the -top of a hill, and here those to remain at the fort halted. The others -went on and presently a bend in the road hid them from view. - -“I pray to heaven that they have a safe journey home,” said James -Morris, with much feeling. - -As my old readers know, there were two roads running between Fort Pitt -and the east—one the old trail used by General Braddock on his -disastrous campaign and the other used by General Forbes on his march to -victory. The Braddock road was now but little used, and Rodney and his -friends took to the other, as being perhaps safer and easier. - -The advance was in regular order, half of the frontiersmen and regulars -going ahead and the others keeping to the rear. In the center came the -pack-horses, with Rodney and Dobson in charge. With Mrs. Dobson were -Nell and the twins, who walked or rode, as suited them. - -In these days of fast trains, trolley cars, and automobiles it is -difficult to imagine what such a journey as this before the colonists -meant. Instead of covering thirty to sixty miles an hour they were -content to cover ten to twenty miles between sunrise and sunset. The -road lay over the hills and through the mountains, with mighty forests -on all sides, where the ring of the woodsman’s axe had scarcely been -heard. Great rivers were to be crossed, and if the bridge was down or -out of repair they had to find another place to cross or else stop to -mend the structure. Where the road lay along a mountain side the rain -would sometimes cover it with mud and stones to a depth of a foot or -more, making the advance extra laborious. Here and there the wind had -blown a tree down over their path, and then they would have to either -work their way around it, or else cut through or over it. In some spots -the tree-branches were so low the horses could scarcely get under them, -and here all the travelers would have to advance on foot, and see to it -that none of the packs were lost. Once a pack caught on a sharp bough -and tore open, scattering the contents in all directions. - -“Won’t catch me coming out here again,” grumbled Asa Dobson. “Folks out -Baltimore way said I could make my fortune in them western countries, -but I don’t see it. Them Injuns nearly killed me and my wife twict, and -they stole my hoss, and I’m going to stay in the east after this, and -work for my old master, the Earl of Chester. The Injuns can have them -western countries for all o’ me!” - -“Don’t you want to be your own master and own your own plantation?” -asked Rodney. - -“No, not if I’ve got to fight Injuns to keep it,” answered Dobson. He -was used to life around the larger towns, and the loneliness of the -wilderness struck him with a peculiar terror. - -However the journey had its bright spots. The men in advance always -secured plenty of game—deer, rabbits, squirrels, wild turkeys, and -partridges—and the children often stopped to pick the wild flowers which -still bloomed along the roadside. At nightfall they would go into camp -beside some brook or spring of pure mountain water, and there would -gather around a generous campfire, to eat the main meal of the day and -make themselves at home. During the evening hours Sam Barringford would -tell the children wonderful stories of hunting, or of his army -adventures while out with Dave and Henry,—tales which they listened to -with much interest. - -“Tom is going to be a soldier when he grows up,” said one of the little -boys. - -“Artie is going to be a soldier too, and have a beautiful uniform,” put -in the other promptly. They spoke thus in childish fashion, little -dreaming of the days to come when they would both shoulder their muskets -in the War for Independence. - -So far they had met nobody on the road. When Sunday came they spent the -day in a much-needed rest. Nell repeated to Rodney some Bible verses and -tried to teach them to the twins. - -On Monday afternoon those in advance saw a pack-train approaching, -composed of eight horses and one cart, and in charge of six frontiersmen -and a trader named Packerson. - -“Where bound, Packerson?” asked Sam Barringford. - -“Fort Pitt,” was the short reply. Packerson was a rather silent man, of -few words. - -“Come straight through from Cumberland?” - -“Yes.” - -“See any Injuns?” - -“Seven. Had a fight with ’em too,” answered the trader. Then his train -came to a halt, and the others at once surrounded him for particulars of -the encounter. - - - - - CHAPTER VIII - THE MASSACRE OF A PACK-TRAIN - - -Jed Packerson’s story was soon told. His party had first seen the -Indians while crossing a high hill where a landslide had carried down -many trees of the forest to the valley below. As soon as discovered the -red men had run for shelter. Half an hour later one of the frontiersmen -had given the alarm, and the next moment a shower of arrows had fallen -around them, hitting one man in the shoulder. Then two guns had been -discharged and a horse had been hit in the thigh and had stampeded. The -whites had returned the fire of the Indians, who, however, had kept -under cover. At least one red warrior had been wounded, and then the -whole party had taken themselves to parts unknown. The horse to run away -was still missing and Packerson had decided to let him go rather than -lose time on a trail that appeared so dangerous. - -The fight had occurred two days before, and the spot where the Indians -had opened fire was less than sixteen miles away. This was disturbing -news to Rodney and his friends, and after Packerson had continued on his -way a council of war was held. - -“We’ll have to be on our guard night an’ day,” said Sam Barringford. -“The advance guard will have to spread out purty well an’ beat the brush -thoroughly. At the first sign o’ danger, whistle or fire a gun and then -come to the center.” - -The old frontiersman had been selected as a leader, and the others -agreed to follow his advice. The bordermen and the regulars spread out -into a regular circle around the pack-horses and those with the steeds, -and Mrs. Dobson and the children were cautioned not to wander off by the -roadside under any circumstances. - -That evening the party encamped by the side of a stream at a point where -there was a good-sized opening in the forest. Guards were stationed on -both sides of the watercourse, every man being on duty four hours during -the darkness. The horses were tethered in a circle and in the center a -small tent was pitched, in which Mrs. Dobson, Nell, and the twins might -rest. - -Sam Barringford remained on guard duty from eight o’clock to midnight, -his post being to the north of the camp proper, where the stream made a -turn between some rocks and tall trees. The old frontiersman was tired -out by his day’s tramp, but did not grumble over being compelled to keep -awake. - -“It’s got to be done, an’ thet’s all there are to it,” he said to -Rodney, “Reckon we kin sleep a week when we git to hum.” - -“I shan’t mind staying awake, when my turn comes,” answered Rodney. “But -I do hope the Indians won’t appear. I shouldn’t care so much if we were -alone, but with Mrs. Dobson, Nell, and the twins it is different.” - -The night was a fairly clear one, with countless stars showing between -the drifting clouds. There was no breeze worth mentioning and the -stillness, away from the somewhat restless horses, was intense. - -Barringford walked slowly up and down the watercourse, occasionally -mounting one of the rocks to get a better look at the surroundings. His -trained eyes took in a good portion of territory, and the least movement -among the trees would have attracted his attention. He was sleepy, but -he did not allow his eyes to close for an instant. - -He had just climbed down from the rocks for at least the tenth time, -when he heard a rustle in some bushes at a distance. He listened with -strained ears, at the same time dropping flat upon the ground, so that a -possible enemy might not see him too readily. - -All became silent, and he waited patiently for several minutes. Then -came the crack of a twig, as some weight pressed upon it. A moment more -and a figure ran through the bushes, not towards the camp but from it. - -“Help!” came in a woman’s voice. “Help!” - -“Mrs. Dobson, by ginger!” ejaculated the old frontiersman. “What’s the -matter with her?” - -The fleeing woman was some distance away, and he made after her with all -possible speed. She crashed through the bushes and he came after her. - -“Mrs. Dobson!” he called. “What is the matter? Stop!” - -His cries, and those of the frantic woman, aroused the entire camp, and -Dobson himself came rushing toward Barringford, followed by Rodney. - -The old frontiersman soon gained the immediate rear of the woman. As he -did so, he heard a rush through the thickets ahead and caught a glimpse -of an Indian. Then he saw another red warrior rise up from behind a -rock, tomahawk in hand. This fellow made a leap for Mrs. Dobson, but -before he could use his weapon, Barringford brought his long rifle into -play and the Indian pitched forward, fatally wounded in the breast. The -other Indian continued to run, and so did several others who could be -heard but not seen, and soon their footsteps died away in the distance. - -“Maria, what is it?” cried Asa Dobson, catching his wife by the arm. -“What is it?” And he gave her a shake. Then he saw her open her eyes and -stare at him. “Creation! Be you asleep?” he gasped. - -“Asa! Oh, save me!” she screamed. “Save me from the Indians! Don’t let -them scalp me!” Then she gazed around in bewilderment. “I—I thought we -were at the fort and the Indians had come in after us,” she faltered. - -“You were dreaming,” said her husband. “We are on the journey to -Cumberland and Baltimore.” - -“Yes, yes, I know; but—but——” She stared around her. “I—I—where is the -tent, and the horses?” - -“You’ve had a nightmare, and it did us a heap o’ good,” broke in Sam -Barringford. “Your runnin’ around has scared off some redskins, I -reckon.” - -By this time half a dozen were near. They gazed at the red warrior whom -Barringford had laid low. - -“He is done for,” said Rodney. “He is too far gone even to question -him.” But even as the young soldier spoke the red man raised up suddenly -and flung his tomahawk squarely at Barringford. The fling was a weak one -and the weapon fell short of its mark. Then the warrior sank back, gave -a gasp, and was dead. - -“Game to the last,” muttered Barringford. “Don’t know as I blame him. -Might be I’d do likewise, ef one o’ the varmin plugged me,” he added -philosophically. - -It took several minutes for Mrs. Dobson to settle herself. Her husband -stated that she often arose in her sleep. She had been terribly worked -up over the red men ever since leaving Fort Pitt, and this had gotten on -her nerves. - -The alarm kept the entire camp “on edge” until daybreak. Barringford and -two others made several tours in the immediate vicinity, but could see -or hear nothing more of the enemy. - -“They have either cleared out entirely, or else they know how to hide,” -said the old frontiersman. - -“Do you think it is the same party that Packerson met?” questioned -Rodney. - -“Like as not, Rodney. We ain’t seen or heard o’ anybody else on this -trail.” - -They went on as before, and the following forenoon made a discovery that -filled even the stoutest of them with horror. Coming to a spot where the -road led down to a ford over a good-sized brook they beheld a man lying -beside a rock, with one ear gone and part of his scalp cut away. The man -was shot through the body and was all but dead. - -“Who shot you?” asked one of the frontiersman, running up. - -“Th—the Indians,” was the low and hoarse answer. “Water!” - -Water was brought, but the man was almost too weak to drink. One of the -party recognized him as Stephen Banoggin, a trader well known in those -days around Carlisle and Bedford. Banoggin had left Bedford ten days -before, with a view of establishing a new trading post in the vicinity -of Venango as soon as it seemed safe to do so. - -“All dead—all killed by the Indians!” was about all he could say. “Fool, -fool that I was to attempt it! All dead!” And that night he expired. - -His tale was almost true, although not quite so. His pack-train had -consisted of ten horses and nine men, including three negroes who were -his slaves. The Indians—a mixed band under a chief called Crow -Feather—had ambushed the train at the ford and slained or mortally -wounded all but one negro and a white hunter named Sturm, a German from -upper Pennsylvania. Sturm and the negro got away together, each however -wounded. They traveled for four weeks in the forest, when Sturm went -crazy. At last they reached a settlement, where the negro told his -story. Sturm was placed under medical care and regained his reason some -time later. - -The sights presented to Rodney and the others at the ford were so -revolting that Mrs. Dobson, Nell, and the twins were held back, that -they might not see what had occurred. The slain were all scalped and an -effort had been made to burn one at the stake. The bodies of the men and -the dead horses lay together. Four horses were missing, and on these the -Indians had packed such stores as they wanted, scattering the other -goods or burning them. - -“This is enough to make one sick!” said Rodney, as he turned away with a -shudder. “These redskins must have been fiends!” - -“They were certainly cold-blooded,” answered Barringford. “Poor -Banoggin! He had better have stayed in the east.” - -“Sam, this doesn’t look as if it would be safe for us to go any -further.” - -“Easily said, lad; but what are ye goin’ to do?” - -“You mean it is as safe to go forward as to turn back?” - -“Don’t it look thet way?” - -“Maybe. But we are a little closer to Fort Pitt than we are to Fort -Cumberland.” - -“Thet’s true too. But I don’t reckon the Injuns will dare to go as far -east as Cumberland—not after the lickin’ they got at Bushy Run.” - -“The band that did this can’t be the band that tried to surround us.” - -“No, they are another tribe, I think.” - -“Then the forest must still be full of wandering bands, and we are not -near as safe as we thought we were.” - -“We’ve got to make the best on’t, Rodney. We must travel as fast as we -can and keep our eyes peeled more’n ever before. It’s the only way out, -so far as I kin see.” - -The bodies of the slain were placed in a hollow, with some flat stones -on top, to keep off the wolves and other wild beasts. The place was -marked on the trees. A few of Banoggin’s possessions were taken along -and the others left where they had fallen. - -“Poor fellow, he will never want anything in this life again,” murmured -Rodney, brokenly. And when the trader died they placed his body away -with those of his followers. Fortunately he had been a bachelor, so -there would be no widow or child to mourn his loss. - -Early in the morning Rodney and those with him moved on again. Everybody -in the party was exceedingly sober. All realized their great danger. The -fate of Stephen Banoggin and his party was ever before their eyes and in -their thoughts. - - - - - CHAPTER IX - UNDER THE CLIFF - - -“Thank fortune we have come so far without injury!” - -It was Rodney who uttered the words. He and Sam Barringford were -standing on a little rise of ground, the trail in front and behind them. -The warm noonday sun shone down upon them, and all was calm and peaceful -with not an enemy of any kind in sight. Close at hand Dobson and his -wife were preparing a meal for all hands and little Nell was playing -with the twins. - -Two days had passed since they had left the fateful ford, and they had -covered thirty-two miles, over a trail which the past rains had left in -anything but a good condition. They had been on guard every minute, day -and night, their nerves strung to top tension. The early morning had -taken them through a spot lined upon either side with tall rocks, and -they had expected a shot at almost every turn—but nothing had come to -disturb them. - -Considering the condition of the road, the horses had done well. Only -one was injured,—from slipping over some rocks,—but he could still carry -his load. Nobody was sick, although the constant worry had given Mrs. -Dobson a headache. - -“While we are waiting for dinner, let us go ahead and look at the -trail,” suggested Rodney; and Barringford agreed. Not far off was -another hollow, backed by a cliff of rocks, overgrown with heavy vines, -and they were both anxious to know what was beyond. - -They gained the region of the cliff without difficulty. To save himself -the trouble of climbing the rough rocks, Rodney tested the vines and -then commenced to pull himself up, hand over hand. - -“Be careful that you don’t fall!” cried the old frontiersman. “These -rocks at the bottom ain’t no easy bed to drop on, I kin tell ye thet!” - -“The vines are strong enough to hold a horse,” answered the young -soldier. - -He continued to go up, until he was a good fifteen feet over -Barringford’s head. He had still six feet to go, when he heard a slight -sound from above. - -“Must be the vines tearing away,” he told himself, after a pause. “Maybe -they are not as strong as I thought they were.” - -[Illustration: He glanced up, saw his dire peril, and let himself -drop.—_Page 77._] - -He waited and then went up an additional foot or two. The vines held, -and he took another grip of them a little higher up. His head was now -within a yard of the top of the cliff, which was covered with the vines -and a stunted growth of bushes. - -Suddenly, from out of the bushes, there appeared the head of an Indian, -bedecked in war-paint and feathers. Then a long, bronzed arm stole -forward, holding a tomahawk. The tomahawk was raised and a blow was -aimed at Rodney’s head. - -Had the blow fallen as intended, the young soldier’s skull must have -been cleft in twain. He glanced up, saw his dire peril, and let himself -drop. An instant later a shot rang out from below, and the Indian’s hand -quivered and the hatchet slipped down among the vines and out of sight. - -Rodney struck the rocks below heavily and rolled over. When he sat up he -found Sam Barringford beside him, the smoke still rolling out of the -frontiersman’s gun. - -“Oh, Sam——” he began, and knew not what further to say. - -“Press in clost to the wall,” answered the frontiersman, hastily, and -began to reload his rifle with all speed. Rodney’s gun stood against the -rocks, where he had left it on starting to mount the cliff. - -“Did you hit him, Sam?” - -“Yes, an’ I reckon I broke his wrist—leas’wise, he drapped the tomahawk. -It was a narrer shave fer you, lad.” - -“Indeed it was.” Rodney tried to catch his breath, which the sudden drop -had knocked out of him. “Do you suppose he is alone?” - -“Ain’t supposin’ nuthin jest yit. Are you all right?” - -“I—think so.” - -Both pressed in close to the rocky wall, so that no one standing above -could see them. They listened, but no sound from above reached them. - -“Perhaps the Indian ran away,” said Rodney, wiping the blood from where -his left hand had been scratched. - -“Don’t be too sure, Rodney.” - -“If the enemy are so close we ought to warn the others.” - -“The rifle shot will do that. Maybe somebuddy will be comin’ this way -soon.” - -They waited another five minutes, even the old frontiersman not knowing -exactly what to do. Then they saw a frontiersman named Casbury coming -forward, slowly and cautiously. - -“Look out!” shouted Barringford. “Injun on the rocks!” And he pointed -upward. - -Casbury understood, and promptly dove out of sight behind some bushes. -As he did this there was a crashing through the vines, and a mass of -rocks and dirt came down directly in front of where Rodney and -Barringford were standing. - -“Goin’ to bombard us with rocks, hey?” snorted the old frontiersman. -“Maybe I kin play ye a trick fer that. Groan, Rodney, groan,” and he -began to groan and moan, as if in the greatest of pain. Rodney did the -same, keeping it up several minutes. Then both began to breathe heavily, -as though totally exhausted. - -Several minutes more passed and Rodney and Barringford breathed softer -and softer. Thrown off their guard, and thinking the whites dead or -mortally hurt, three Indians leaned over the edge of the cliff to get a -view of the situation. - -The young soldier and the old frontiersman were on the alert, and as -soon as the warriors appeared they blazed away. Two drew back, one with -a shot through the side of the neck. The third pitched forward with a -yell, struck the rocks head first, and lay dead where he had landed. - -“There, I reckon thet will teach ’em a lesson,” cried Sam Barringford, -as he and Rodney again loaded up. - -A shot was now fired by Casbury, and another Indian was hit in the -shoulder. Then Casbury saw four Indians run from the front of the cliff -and disappear in the bushes far back. - -“Come on, if you want to!” cried Casbury, and leaving the shelter of the -cliff Rodney and Barringford made for the camp with all haste. Here they -found all the others on guard. The midday meal was forgotten, and the -men stood ready to shoot the moment a red warrior showed himself. - -“This is the worst possible place to be caught in,” said Rodney. “The -Indians can get behind yonder trees and pick us off at will—if they have -any firearms.” - -“I saw nothing but bows and arrows,” said Casbury. “Still, they may have -guns.” - -The situation was talked over while they waited for the Indians to -reappear. Some brushwood had been gathered for the fire, and Mrs. Dobson -and the children were placed behind this and behind some of the horses. - -“I’m going over into the woods,” said Barringford, to the others. “If I -see anything wrong, I’ll screech like an owl.” - -“Do you want me to go along?” asked Rodney. - -“No, lad, I want you to stay here, by Nell an’ the twins.” - -Barringford slipped to the rear, crawled through the grass, and thus -reached a few low bushes, from which he made his way into the forest. - -Two hours went by slowly. Not an Indian showed himself, nor did any -signal come from Barringford. The men remained on the alert, and when a -rabbit crossed the trail two drew a bead on the animal like a flash. - -“I trust Sam hasn’t gotten into trouble,” said Rodney, at last. - -“If he has, he’ll have to git out o’ it,” answered one of the others, -with a shrug of his shoulders. - -Presently one of the regulars saw a form wriggling through the grass. He -was on the point of firing when he recognized the old frontiersman. -Barringford came in a good deal out of breath. - -“We’ve got to move, an’ move quick, too!” he announced. “There’s a crowd -o’ thirty Injuns over thar,”—he pointed with his hand. “They are goin’ -to attack us as soon as the sun goes down.” - -“But where shall we move to?” questioned Rodney. - -“I war thinkin’ o’ thet cave ye spoke about, Hempser,” went on -Barringford, turning to one of the other old hunters. “You said it war -nigh here.” - -“It’s half a mile beyond the cliff,” was Hempser’s answer. “I don’t know -the way very good, but I think I can find it.” - -“Then thet is where we’ll go, an’ to onct,” decided Sam Barringford. - -Not a minute was lost in breaking camp, and in a close body the -pack-train set out, past the cliff and then through a valley of heavy -grass and bushes. The men carried their guns ready for use, and screened -Mrs. Dobson and the children as much as possible. - -“Oh dear! I’d rather be dead than be so worried,” sighed the woman. “I -am that nervous I am ready to drop!” - -At the end of the short valley was another rise of rocks, among which -was located the cave. They had just gained the first of the rocks when a -hideous war-whoop sounded out on the afternoon air. - -“They have discovered us!” cried Rodney, and he was right. At the far -end of the valley appeared fully a score of Indians, a few on horseback -and the others on foot. - -The Indians had been surprised, thinking the whites were still on the -trail. But they soon recovered, and came riding and running towards our -friends, yelling at the top of their lungs and flourishing their -tomahawks. A moment later they sent a volley of arrows and several rifle -shots, for some carried one kind of weapon and some the other. - -“Are you hurt?” asked Barringford of Rodney, as he saw the young soldier -stagger. - -“No, an arrow hit me in the coat-sleeve, that’s all—it didn’t get -through my shirt though.” - -One of the regulars had been struck by a bullet in the shoulder, and his -friends had to help him along. Then the Indians sent forth more arrows, -one of which tore through little Nell’s dress. - -“Oh!” cried the little miss, in great terror. - -“Give ’em a dose o’ their own medicine!” ordered Barringford. “Make the -shots tell!” And then everybody fired at the advancing foe, and three of -the red warriors pitched into the grass, while two others stopped -running and then limped to the rear, badly wounded. - -Hempser was looking around anxiously for the cave. At first he could not -locate it, but, just as the Indians advanced again, he discovered a hole -and rushed towards it. - -“Here you are!” he shouted. “This way! Once in the cave, I think we can -hold ’em at bay!” - -“Into the cave!” cried Barringford. “Mrs. Dobson and the children first. -Hempser, is there a back opening?” - -“Yes, but not a very big one. We can close it up with loose rocks.” - -“Then you run back and pile up the rocks. The others remain at this -opening, to keep the Indians at a distance.” - - - - - CHAPTER X - BARRINGFORD AS A SCOUT - - -The volley poured into the Indians by the whites made the red warriors -pause for the time being. They were close to a clump of bushes and trees -growing near the center of the glade, and they got behind this shelter -with alacrity. - -In the cave all was confusion. It was an opening ten to fifteen feet in -height and equally broad at the mouth. It ran back a distance of over -two hundred feet, where it ended in a split among the rocks, coming out -at a point where there was a thick patch of nettle bushes. - -The horses had been brought into the cave and were led to the rear. Here -Hempser worked like a Trojan, with one of the regulars helping him. -Loose stones were to be had in plenty, and they blocked up the rear -opening completely. - -“They’ll have their hands full, getting in this way,” said the regular. -“The nettles will keep them back if nothing else will.” - -“Right you are,” answered Hempser. “Injuns don’t like to git scratched -any more than anybody else.” - -At the front of the cavern Sam Barringford took command. A glance showed -him how the land lay, and he at once ordered some of the men to pile up -the loose stones to a height of several feet. This formed a barricade, -behind which the frontiersmen and regulars could lie with but little -danger of the enemy picking them off. - -“This is a situation we didn’t bargain for,” said Rodney, after the -construction of the barricade had come to an end. “I must say I don’t -like it.” - -“Well, lad, it’s better than being surrounded in the open,” answered -Barringford, with an effort to look on the bright side of the affair. - -“I don’t think they’ll attack us now,” went on the young soldier. “But -they may do it to-night.” - -“We’ll have to keep on guard, and shoot the first man who shows -himself,” put in Casbury. - -“Maybe they’ll try to starve us out,” came from another of the -frontiersman. - -“We’ve got rations enough for a week or more, on a pinch,” said Rodney. -“We’ve got our regular things and also that deer Barton shot early this -morning, and some rabbits.” - -“How about water?” asked another. - -“We’ll have to see about that,” said Sam Barringford. - -Satisfied that the Indians did not contemplate an immediate attack, the -old frontiersman, accompanied by Rodney, made a tour of the cave, -lighting a torch for that purpose. In one corner the rocks were found to -be very damp, and when some were pulled up a little water trickled -forth. - -“Thar’s a spring thar,” said Barringford, with satisfaction. “We kin do -a bit o’ diggin’ an’ then have all the water we wish.” A little later -two of the regulars set to work, with pike-poles and shovels, and soon -had a hollow made into which the water flowed to a depth of several -inches. The water was brought up in a dipper, and proved to be both -clear and wholesome. - -As the time slipped by the whole party became more composed, and Nell -and the twins clamored for their delayed dinner. A meal was prepared in -the cave, which the men ate while on the watch. - -“Oh, Rodney, will the bad Indians catch us in here?” asked Nell, as she -came up to her elder brother. - -“I think not, Nell,” he answered, hopefully. - -“I wish I was home.” - -“So do I, Nell—wish it more for your sake than for my own.” - -“Tom wants to go out and fight the bad Indians,” said one of the twins. -He had picked up a rifle resting against the wall and was trying to -shoulder the long weapon. - -“Here, you give me that gun!” cried Rodney, reaching for it. “Tom, you -mustn’t play with the guns. One of ’em might go off and hurt you.” - -“Tom ain’t ’fraid of no gun,” said the little boy. “Want to shoot the -Indians.” - -“You keep quiet and stay with Mrs. Dobson or Nell.” - -“How long will we have to stay here, Rodney?” asked his little sister. - -“I can’t answer that question, Nell. It depends on the Indians. Perhaps -they’ll get tired of watching us and go away.” - -It was a hard matter to keep the twins quiet, but presently both grew -tired of wandering around the cave, and went to sleep on a pair of -blankets spread out for them. Mrs. Dobson sat on one of the packs with -Nell beside her and her husband not far off. - -“Oh, Asa, how foolish we were to come out to this western country!” -sighed the woman, for at least the fiftieth time. “We should have stayed -at home and been content with what we had!” - -“Ain’t no uset to cry over spilt milk,” grumbled her husband. - -“I think the Indians will come to-night and scalp all of us!” - -“Oh, Mrs. Dobson, you don’t mean that!” gasped little Nell. - -“Don’t scare the little girl, Mrs. Dobson,” put in Casbury, who chanced -to be near. “It won’t help matters to git anybuddy worked up.” - -At last the sun sank in the west and it began to grow dark at the mouth -of the cave. Two men were stationed at the spot where the rear opening -had been, and all the others gathered at the front. Then Sam Barringford -called Rodney to him. - -“I’m a-goin’ out on a scoutin’ tour,” said the old frontiersman. “I’m -a-goin’ to leave you an’ Casbury in charge until I git back. Don’t shoot -me, but don’t let none o’ them Injuns git near, nuther.” - -“Don’t you want me to go with you, Sam?” - -“No, it will be hard enough fer one to git around, let alone two. Ef ye -ain’t sure it’s me comin’ back, hoot like an owl an’ I’ll answer like a -catbird, understand?” - -“Yes.” - -Barringford gave the others a few directions and then, stepping quickly -over the rocks, snaked his way along through the grass to a fringe of -low bushes. From the bushes he made for the rough rocks, where he -paused, to consider the situation in all of its details. - -The old frontiersman felt that he was surrounded by enemies fully as -alert as himself and ready to shoot him down on sight. - -“An’ they won’t ax me if I’ll like it nuther,” he murmured to himself. -“They be jest a-hankerin’ arter my sculp like all possessed.” - -Peering cautiously around, he saw nobody, and after a short wait took -his way between the rocks towards the spot where the rear of the cave -was located. Here he listened again, and this time heard the low murmur -of two voices. But they were those of Dobson, the settler, and a -regular, talking from inside. - -“They ought to know enough to keep quiet,” mused the old frontiersman, -in disgust. “How can they spot the enemy if they gab like thet?” - -In a few minutes the voices ceased, and thinking the coast clear the old -frontiersman worked his way among the rocks and through the bushes -toward a point he imagined the Indians might be holding. The darkness of -night had now fallen completely over the forest and scarcely a sound -broke the stillness. - -Barringford was about to cross to another patch of brushwood when the -distant call of a night bird arrested his attention. He was well versed -in the calls of all birds and that which he heard did not sound exactly -true to his ear. He smiled grimly to himself and waited. - -As he had surmised, an answering call soon followed. It came from the -very brushwood he had been on the point of entering, and a tall Indian -stepped forth, as if to advance. Before Barringford could retreat or -draw to one side the pair were face to face. - -Not a word was uttered—indeed, there was no time for speech. The Indian -had his tomahawk in his hand, and this he raised, aiming a blow at the -old frontiersman’s skull. As old as he was getting, Barringford was -still nimble on his feet and dexterously dodged to one side. As the arm -of the red warrior came down, he caught the red man by the shoulder, and -over went the pair on the soil. Then the Indian tried to cry out, but -Barringford’s hand was clapped on his mouth. - -It now became a desperate but silent struggle for life. From the red -man’s mouth, the old frontiersman’s hand was shifted to his throat, -which was caught with a grip of steel. The Indian struggled desperately, -first kicking heavily and then drawing up a knee against Barringford’s -breast. Then he tried to use his tomahawk again, and hit the -frontiersman a glancing blow on the shoulder. The hatchet fell, and in a -twinkling the Indian had Barringford by the throat, in a clutch equally -firm and relentless. - -Like two bulldogs that have a death-grip and will not let go, white man -and Indian rolled over and over, on the rocks and in the bushes, each -doing all in his power to get the better of the other. The Indian was -muscular, and his strength was equal if not superior to that of his -white adversary. But Barringford had secured the first grip, and the red -man’s breath was fast leaving him. His tongue stuck out, his eyes bulged -from their sockets, and he could not utter even so much as a faint -gurgle. - -It was at this moment that an interruption came. Another form glided -into the midst of the bushes. It was a second Indian, and a glance -showed him the condition of affairs. Without stopping to use his -tomahawk or his knife he kicked Barringford heavily in the left ear. -Then followed other blows, and with a groan the old frontiersman -stretched out on the rocks unconscious. - -As the hold on his throat relaxed the Indian who had been in the death -struggle gave a gasp and stared about him. The coming of his fellow -warrior had undoubtedly saved his life. - -“Where did that white man come from?” asked the second Indian, as he -gave Barringford a close look. - -“Cushina knows not,” was the faint reply. It was some time before the -other could get back his breath. - -“Are there others about?” - -At this question Cushina shrugged his shoulders. - -“Did he come from the cave, think you?” - -“Perhaps—all of the whites were driven to that shelter, like so many -dogs of the prairie.” - -“It may not be so. Others may be at hand. We must be careful. Moon Eye -has news of some soldiers. They may be marching in this direction.” - -“Then Moon Eye himself is here?” - -“Yes.” - -The first warrior drew a long breath and then brought from his girdle a -keen hunting knife. He felt of its edge with satisfaction. - -“Mist of the Lake has come to the aid of Cushina and has brought the -white man to grief,” said he, looking at the other closely. “Does Mist -of the Lake claim the scalp?” - -At this query the second Indian shrugged his shoulders. - -“Does Cushina still wish to linger in the footsteps of Laughing Eyes and -make her his bride?” he asked, after another pause. - -Cushina winced at this question. Both he and Mist of the Lake were in -love with the same Indian maiden. As Mist of the Lake had saved his life -he was bound, according to the laws of his tribe, to give his rival a -clear field in his wooing. - -“Laughing Eyes is Mist of the Lake’s—if she will have him,” he said, in -a low voice. - -“And the scalp of the white man belongs to Cushina,” was the prompt -reply of the other warrior. “He can take it at his pleasure.” - - - - - CHAPTER XI - IN WHICH WHITE BUFFALO APPEARS - - -“Something must surely have happened to Sam, or he wouldn’t stay away as -long as this,” said Rodney to Casbury, after half the night had passed -without the old frontiersman reappearing. - -“I am afraid you are right, Rodney. Maybe the Injuns caught an’ killed -him.” - -“Don’t you think somebody ought to go out and try to hunt him up?” - -“It won’t be any safer for us than it was for him,” answered the -borderman, with a grave shake of his head. - -Had it not been for Nell and the twins Rodney might have gone on a hunt -for his old friend. But he felt his responsibility, and so remained in -the cavern. He felt that if an attack came his place was beside his -sister and the twins. Barringford thought as much of the twins as if -they were his own flesh and blood, and would not forgive him did he not -do all he could to shield the youngsters from harm. - -Slowly the time wore away. Nell, the twins, and Mrs. Dobson had gone to -sleep, and also several of the frontiersmen and regulars, who were off -duty for the time being. The cave was kept in total darkness, so that -those inside could see better what was happening without. - -Rodney had listened for the cry of a catbird in vain, and stood leaning -against a rock, peering forth into the semi-darkness. He was -tremendously sleepy, having gotten only a short nap the night before. - -Presently he straightened up and listened. Was he mistaken, or had he -heard the croaking of a frog? He had not noticed this earlier in the -night. - -He was not mistaken; the croaking was repeated, at regular intervals. He -could not resist the temptation to croak also, mimicking the sound as -best he could. At once the answer came back, and the heart of the young -soldier gave a bound of astonishment and gratification. - -The call was one often used by White Buffalo, the old chief of the -Delawares who had proved such a friend to the different members of the -Morris family. What he could be doing in this vicinity was a mystery, -since it was supposed that he was either at the regular village of his -tribe or at the conference being held by Sir William Johnson and the red -men at Johnson Hall. - -“Perhaps it’s a ruse,” thought Rodney. “I must be on my guard—it won’t -do to be caught in a trap.” - -The croaking of the frog continued, moving gradually closer to the mouth -of the cave. Then Rodney saw something wave in the air, between two -bushes. The object went up and down twice, then crosswise three times -and then around in a circle. - -“White Buffalo true enough!” murmured the young soldier. He called some -of the others to his side. “White Buffalo, a friendly Indian, is out -there. He wants to talk to us.” - -“I’ll trust none of them,” said one of the regulars promptly. “They are -all cutthroats!” - -“White Buffalo has been a friend to our family for years,” went on the -young soldier. “I can vouch for him in every respect. You know him, -Casbury, and so do you, Malloy.” - -“Yes, he is square, so far as I know,” answered Casbury. - -“He’s a putty good Indian, so he is,” said the Irish borderman -mentioned. “But not wan av thim can be thrusted whin the war’s goin’ -ag’in ’im. Betther be afther bein’ careful, Rodney.” - -“He wants to talk to us—he has something important to say,” persisted -Rodney. - -“How do yez know that?” - -“He just signaled to me. He and my brother Henry and cousin Dave are -great friends, and White Buffalo taught us some of his signals. We had -better let him come in and talk to us.” - -Those in the cave discussed the matter and at last agreed to follow -Rodney’s advice. But they remained on guard, to shoot White Buffalo or -any other Indian down, at the first sign of treachery. - -The matter settled, Rodney signaled White Buffalo to approach. He -started to go forth, to meet the friendly red man, but White Buffalo -quickly warned him back. In a minute the old Delaware chief was in the -cavern. - -“White Buffalo, I am glad to see you,” cried Rodney, shaking hands. - -“How! how!” returned the aged Indian. He peered closely at Rodney in the -darkness. “My friend Rodney is better? He can walk well?” - -“Yes, I am much better. And how are you? Hello, there is blood on your -face!” - -“White Buffalo had a fight—down by the river—with some other Indians. -They had almost killed his old friend Barringford.” - -“Sam! Is he alive?” - -“Yes—White Buffalo knocked an Indian over. Then he took Sam and ran -through the forest. They were about to torture Sam—to make him speak of -this place and who was here. First one Indian wanted his scalp, but Moon -Eye came up and stopped the bloody work.” - -“And you fought the Indians alone?” - -“No, White Buffalo has six warriors with him—they are watching down at -the river. Sam could not come—he is too sorely wounded. He sent White -Buffalo. He told White Buffalo to cry as a catbird, but that is a bad -signal—it would bring Moon Eye and his warriors to the spot. So White -Buffalo used the old signal—the one he taught to Dave and Henry. He -thought his friend Rodney would remember.” - -“And I did remember. But you are hurt. Let me bind up the wound.” - -“’Tis but a scratch,” answered the aged Indian. The cut smarted greatly, -but he would not show his pain. - -“See here, what do you know about the other Indians around here?” asked -Casbury. - -“They number thirty,” said White Buffalo, who had learned how to count -in English style. “All strong, crafty, and full of the war spirit. White -Buffalo’s small band can do but little against them.” - -In his own fashion the Indian then told his story in detail, how he and -his followers were journeying to a distant village, to try to bring -their entire tribe in harmony with each other. They had seen the actions -of Moon Eye and his followers while at a distance and come to the -conclusion that something unusual was going on. They had come closer and -heard the other Indians discuss the subject of an attack on the cave. -The followers of Moon Eye intended to wait until daybreak and then try -to smoke out those in the place. All the men were to be shot down and -scalped, and the woman and the children were to be made captives. This -much White Buffalo had learned before going to the rescue of Sam -Barringford. What Moon Eye and his men were going to do now, the old -chief could not tell. - -“What do you think we had best do?” asked Rodney, after the recital had -come to an end. - -“Escape from the cavern without delay,” answered the aged Indian. “’Tis -the only hope. Unless that is accomplished you will surely be shot down -like bears coming from a smoke-out.” - -“How shall we go?” - -“If you will trust yourselves to White Buffalo he will do what he can,” -answered the old chief, simply. - -Rodney was willing, and some of the others said they would follow the -chief, but several of the regulars demurred and so did Malloy the -frontiersman. - -“I’ll thrust meself to no redskin,” said the Irishman, with a vigorous -shake of his head. “I have no desire to wake up in the marnin’ wid me -throat cut!” - -“I shall follow White Buffalo,” said Rodney, decidedly. “And I shall -take Nell and Tom and Artie with me.” - -“White Buffalo is a good Indian!” cried Nell, who had awakened and run -forward to greet the old chief, whom she knew by the voice. “I know he -will save me,” and she took his hand confidently. - -At last Malloy and the regulars gave in and all looked to see what White -Buffalo’s first move would be. His plan to rescue them was as old as it -was simple. - -“White Buffalo will go back to his braves,” said the aged chief. “They -will make a great noise to the northward, fire shots and yell. They will -attack one or two of Moon Eye’s men. That will cause Moon Eye to rush -with more warriors to that point. Then my friends must slip away in the -darkness and go down to the river—to the spot where Sam has been left. I -will tell how the spot can be found.” And he did so. - -This matter arranged, White Buffalo added that he and his braves would -join the whites in the morning—the signal to be the croaking of frogs. -Then, after a few additional words to Rodney, he bowed to those around -him, leaped over the barricade of stones, and vanished into the night. - -No time was lost, after the departure of the aged Indian chief, in -getting ready to leave the cave. Such things as could be dispensed with -were left behind. Two horses were brought to the front, and Nell and Tom -were placed on one and Mrs. Dobson and Artie on another. All the men -looked to their firearms and their hunting knives. - -“This may be our last night on earth,” said one regular. “At the best, -we have only a fighting chance.” - -Casbury had followed White Buffalo and was outside, on the watch. He -fancied that he saw an Indian at a distance, but was not sure and did -not fire. - -A half-hour went by—an unusually long time to those in the cavern, whose -nerves were strung to the topmost pitch. All was now in readiness for -the flight, but so far not a sound had broken the stillness. - -“Mebbe something has miscarried,” observed one regular. - -“White Buffalo may be dead,” said another. “One of the Moon Eye crowd -may have been lying in wait for him.” - -A few minutes more passed, and even Rodney was beginning to worry, when -from a distance came a rifle shot. Then arose a mad yelling, and more -shots were fired. The din increased, until the alarm appeared to spread -through the whole of the forest to the north of the cave. White Buffalo -and his six trusty followers were making noise enough for a band of -fifty, and it must be confessed that Moon Eye and his warriors were -taken completely by surprise. - -“’Tis the Delawares!” was the cry. “They have come to do us battle!” - -“Mist of the Lake has been killed!” called out another. “And Squat Foot -is wounded!” - -The din kept on, and for the time being the attention of all the Indians -was taken from the cavern. This was what Rodney had hoped for, and as -soon as he thought it safe, he ordered an advance. The men rushed out of -the cave and, finding the coast clear, urged forward the horses, and -away went the whole expedition into the woods to the south of the -cavern. - -“There is one Injun!” cried an old frontiersman. - -“Don’t shoot—unless it becomes necessary!” said Rodney, hastily, as the -man raised his rifle. “If we can get away silently, so much the better.” - -The Indian had only his bow and arrows with him. He did not stop to -attack the whites, but ran into the forest,—to join those moving to the -north. He, like the others, imagined that a large band of their hated -rivals, the Delawares, had appeared. - -Rodney kept as close as possible to the horses on which rode Mrs. Dobson -and the children. On the other side was Asa Dobson, in such a tremble -that he could scarcely walk. The settler imagined that every minute -might be his last. - -“I’d give all my money to be back home again!” he groaned. - -“Money doesn’t count here,” said Rodney, briefly. “We must use our wits, -and if the worst comes to the worst, fight to the last,—for the sake of -your wife and the children!” - - - - - CHAPTER XII - HOME ONCE MORE - - -The route to the river was a rough one, over jagged rocks and around -stunted growths of evergreens and elderberry bushes, with here and there -a bramble bush or a tangle of wild grapes. Often the men stumbled, and -it was with difficulty that the horses got through without throwing -their loads. - -Not a word was spoken, Rodney cautioning all to silence. Every eye and -ear was on the alert. Who knew but what they might be running into an -ambush of the worst kind? - -When the watercourse was gained,—a small stream flowing to the -southeastward,—they came to a halt in a small grove of hemlocks and -walnuts. Not another Indian had appeared, for which all were thankful. - -The din to the northward was now growing less, and Rodney was certain -that White Buffalo and his handfuls of braves were in retreat, not -daring to meet the superior force under Moon Eye. - -On gaining the vicinity his Indian friend had mentioned to him, Rodney -lost no time in looking around for Sam Barringford. - -“Sam!” he called, softly. “Sam, are you here?” - -“Rodney!” came in a weak voice. “Here I be—an’ glad ye have come!” - -The old frontiersman was up in a short, wide-spreading tree, where White -Buffalo and another friendly red man had placed him. He was weak from -his encounter with the enemy and glad to have the young soldier and the -others come to his aid. - -“I had what ye might call a putty clost shave,” said Barringford. “They -got me down an’ one o’ the rascals war a-goin’ to sculp me when Moon Eye -cuts in an’ says to let me alone—he would torture me into tellin’ em’ -some o’ the white folks’ secrets—about the fort an’ the soldiers on the -march, an’ sech. They war a-goin’ to burn me at a stake—jest as them -Injuns war goin’ to burn me when I war on my way to Detroit with -Dave,—when White Buffalo plays a trick on ’em.” - -“What did he do, Sam?” - -“Got one o’ his followers to wave a torch from some rocks. The feller -war kivered with a white blanket an’ I reckon they took him fer a ghost. -When Moon Eye’s crowd war lookin’ at the figger in white, White Buffalo -come up to me, fixed up as one o’ the enemy, an’ cuts me loose. I didn’t -know him myself till he spoke. The disguise did the trick, and we got -away into the forest. Then I dropped, I war thet weak, and they brung me -here. Then he said he would do what he could fer ye—an’ he must have -kept his word, or ye wouldn’t be here,” concluded the old frontiersman. - -White Buffalo had mentioned another spot—down the river—where the party -of whites might wait until morning for the Delawares to join them. -Helping Sam Barringford upon one of the horses that had been carrying -supplies, they set off for the place mentioned, reaching it without -mishap just as day was breaking. - -By this time the entire party was so worn out that half the number were -glad to throw themselves down to rest, leaving the others on guard for -two hours, when they were relieved by their companions. A light -breakfast was served, no campfire being lit for fear the smoke might -attract the attention of the enemy. - -It was well toward noon when White Buffalo came in, he and his followers -having had to make a wide detour, in order to escape another encounter -with Moon Eye. White Buffalo had been struck in the left forearm by a -tomahawk, an ugly but not a serious cut, and one brave had received an -arrow in the fleshy part of the leg. - -“Do you think they are coming this way?” was Rodney’s first question. - -“There is no telling what they will do next,” answered the aged Indian -chief. “White Buffalo and his followers drew them as far northward as -possible—we could do no more. Rodney had better travel eastward as fast -as he can. In that direction alone lies safety.” - -Without delay the march was once more begun, first to a fording spot -across the stream and then directly eastward. They moved onward until -long after sunset, covering at least fifteen miles, over a broken deer -trail that was rough in the extreme. On the way one horse—that carrying -Nell and little Tom—stepped into a hole and went down, throwing both -children into the bushes. - -“Are you hurt, Nell?” asked Rodney, rushing up in alarm. - -“I—I think not!” she gasped. “But I don’t like such tumbles at all!” - -“Bad horse, to go down with Tom,” said the little boy. - -“He couldn’t help it,” answered Rodney. “I am glad you are not injured,” -he added, heartily, and picked the boy up in his arms while Nell arose -unaided. - -The horse was in a bad way, having broken his leg and dislocated his -shoulder. To put him out of his misery, Rodney had one of the Indians -kill him with several blows from a tomahawk. Then Nell and Tom were -placed on another horse, and the party went on as before. - -The next day found them once more on the regular road. Not a sign of the -enemy had been seen and all began to breathe a little easier. - -“I think we are out of it at last,” said Rodney. “We are getting pretty -well on to the east now.” - -“Right you are,” answered Casbury. - -“That White Buffalo is a pretty good Injun after all, so he is,” -admitted Malloy. - -They had now reached what in past years had been the foremost of the -homesteads along the army road. The places were burned down without -exception, only the blackened ruins showing where log cabins and stables -had stood. The owners had long since either fled or been killed. - -“It may be a long while before this is settled again,” said Rodney. - -“Perhaps not, lad,” answered one of the frontiersmen. “As soon as it is -known the Indians are under control some folks will come out again, and -others will follow,” and this proved to be true. Inside of three years -there were more settlements along the Forbes and the Braddock roads than -ever before. - -Feeling themselves fairly free from danger, they did not push along -quite so rapidly. This rested the horses and was also more comfortable -for Sam Barringford, who had suffered more than he cared to admit. - -“Rodney will not want White Buffalo any more,” said the aged chief one -morning, when they were within two days’ journey of Fort Cumberland. -“White Buffalo must go elsewhere.” - -“Won’t you come home with me?” asked the young soldier. “Father will be -glad to see you, I know.” - -“White Buffalo must attend to the affairs of his tribe,” was the reply, -and soon the aged chief departed with his followers, stating that if it -was possible he would stop at Fort Pitt and let James Morris, Dave, and -Henry know how they had come through without great loss. Rodney thanked -the Indian for all he had done and shook hands warmly, and Barringford -did the same. It was a long while, and many startling things occurred, -before they saw White Buffalo again. - -The thoughts of Rodney and his sister turned homeward now, and both were -anxious to see the old homestead once more. The twins did not remember -much, having been away so long, but they were glad to get away from “the -shooting Indians” as Artie called them. - -It was a cold but clear day when the expedition reached Fort Cumberland. -Here the regulars reported, as they had been told to do, and were -properly discharged from further service in the army. Rodney, -Barringford, and the others also told their stories and delivered a -message sent by Colonel Bouquet, who was still near Fort Pitt, trying to -locate Pontiac. - -All was now comparatively quiet around Fort Cumberland. To the -southward, a small band of Indians had appeared a few weeks before and -attacked some white and colored people, carrying two colored girls, -slaves of a Mr. Bowman, into captivity. To the northward, the enemy had -fallen on a band of Moravians while at their devotions and slaughtered -one of the leaders and two young women. The Moravians were very bitter -and wanted the English army to drive the red men to the far west, beyond -the Mississippi. - -Leaving the others at Fort Cumberland, Rodney took the horses and set -off for the Morris homestead, in company with Barringford, Nell, and the -twins. The route was now familiar even to Nell, and she watched eagerly -for the first sign of the cabin. - -“Papa! I see papa!” she cried, as they made a turn along the brook road, -and soon they saw Joseph Morris walking toward them, rifle in hand, for -none of the settlers thought of going out without being armed. - -“Rodney! and Nell!” burst from Joseph Morris’s lips, and he came running -up with a beaming face. He kissed his little daughter several times. -“Glad you are back! And you too, Sam,” he added to the old frontiersman. -“And how are the twins?” and he chucked them under the chin. - -“I am glad to be back,” said Rodney. “It seems like an age since I went -away and joined the soldiers.” - -They did not stop to tell their story, for it was only a step more to -the log cabin. Mrs. Morris, the kindest of motherly women, came rushing -out of the door to greet them. - -“Nell, my Nell!” she burst out, and hugged her daughter over and over -again, while the tears of joy streamed down her face. “Oh, how glad I am -that you are back!” - -“And I am glad too, mamma,” said Nell. “Oh, it’s been such a very, very -long time since the Indians took me!” - -“And Rodney!” went on Mrs. Morris, kissing his sunburnt cheek. “How did -you stand it? Didn’t the old lameness bother you?” And then she hugged -the twins and shook hands with Sam Barringford. It was indeed a happy -meeting all around. - -“You must stay home, at least for the winter,” said Joseph Morris to his -son. “You have seen enough of peril for a time.” - -“I am willing to stay home,” said Rodney. “But I think I ought to join -Uncle Jim and Dave and Henry in the spring.” - -He told all the news that evening, sitting around the kitchen fire, and -Barringford and little Nell also told their tales. The old frontiersman -wanted to know if any letter had come from England regarding the twins. - -“Nothing as yet,” said Joseph Morris. “But it is something to know that -their father’s name is Maurice Hamilton, and that he is well-to-do. Some -day we shall probably hear from him.” - -Much about the homestead had been destroyed by the Indians, but Joseph -Morris had worked hard to get things into shape again. Family stores had -been brought in, from Fort Cumberland and from Annapolis, and the -settler had cut a pile of wood for winter use. - -“I hope all goes well with those left at Fort Pitt,” said Joseph Morris. -“It is said here that the Indians are very bitter out there.” - -“They certainly are,” answered Rodney. - -“It’s a pity Pontiac was not slain. He is the head and front of this -constant fighting. More than likely he will try to get up another -conspiracy before long.” - -“Your neighbor, Jack Spader, just told me some news,” said Sam -Barringford, who sat on the doorstep, taking his ease in the sunshine. -“It is reported at Fort Cumberland that the Indians are going to make -another attack on Fort Pitt. Nobody seems to know where the report -started.” - -“I trust it is not true,” replied Rodney. - -“So do I,” added Mrs. Morris, “for the sake of Henry, and your uncle, -and Cousin Dave.” - -“Well, they will have to do what they can to take care of themselves,” -said Joseph Morris. “Perhaps we shall have our own hands full here this -winter. The Indians have made no preparations for cold weather, and -rather than starve they may attack us.” - - - - - CHAPTER XIII - AN OLD ENEMY APPEARS - - -After the departure of Rodney, Nell, and the twins from Fort Pitt, -matters at that stronghold went along smoothly for several weeks. Once -Dave and Henry went out hunting with Mr. Morris, and managed to secure a -deer and some smaller game, but that was all. - -In the meantime the meeting that Sir William Johnson had arranged with -the Six Nations and other tribes of Indians from upper New York and from -Canada came to a conclusion. Many of the red men agreed to keep the -peace and some even agreed to take up arms against the Indians of the -Mississippi region, being offered good pay for this service. But others, -including the Senecas, went away murmuring, saying that the English were -trying to rob them of their lands and they would not submit to it. Then -there were certain bands, like that under Moon Eye, that had become -absolutely lawless, killing and plundering whenever the opportunity -offered. Some of these bands united with some of the most lawless of the -French, especially those who held isolated trading posts, and what they -did to make life miserable for the frontiersmen will be told later on. - -The coming of winter in the vicinity of Fort Pitt made hunting extra -good, and both Dave and Henry urged Mr. Morris to go out again. As a -result a party of five was organized, the two others being Tony Jadwin -the frontiersman and another character well known to my old readers, -Peaceful Jones, who had fought so bravely when the Morrises had defended -their trading post the season previous. - -The party took along something in the way of a camping outfit and -expected to be gone at least three days. Although he did not tell those -at the fort, James Morris decided to push westward, to note if the way -was clear, so he might start for his trading post in the spring. - -The first day out the party got on the trail of a whole herd of deer. -But something scared the timid creatures, and they bounded away to the -westward, through a thick snow that was falling at the time. - -“Oh, we must get some of those deer!” cried Henry. “We can’t afford to -miss them!” - -“Well, we’ll get them if the falling snow doesn’t put us off the trail,” -answered his uncle. - -But the snow continued to come down heavily, and by nightfall the chase -had to be abandoned, at least for the time being. They went into camp -between the hemlocks, finding a comfortable shelter under some thick, -snow-laden branches. - -“I wonder if there are any Indians around?” remarked Dave, while they -were eating supper. “I hope not.” - -“It is possible some of them may be out hunting like ourselves,” -answered his father. “Somebody will have to stand guard.” - -But the night passed without interruption. In the morning it began to -snow once more, and this time so furiously that they did not know what -to do. - -“Hunting is all out of the question in sech a storm as this,” said Tony -Jadwin, with a deep sigh. “No game stirring, onless it’s a rabbit, an’ -they ain’t wuth wastin’ powder an’ shot on.” - -The snow kept up until noon and was then over a foot in depth. But after -that the sun came out, making the landscape dazzling white. - -The party was coming out of a heavy stretch of timber when James Morris -called a sudden halt. At a distance could be seen the smoke of a -campfire. - -“Must be Injuns,” was Peaceful Jones’s comment. - -A brief consultation was held, and Tony Jadwin took it on himself to go -forward and investigate. He skirted the clearing and passed among the -trees, and that was the last the others saw of him for a full half-hour. - -“Got news fer ye,” he said, to James Morris, on returning. “Powerful -news, too.” - -“What is it?” demanded the trader, quickly. - -“Who do ye reckon I see over yonder?” - -“Some Indians?” - -“Yes, a handful. But thet ain’t all. I see thet good-fer-nuthin’ -Frenchman thet made so much trouble fer ye fer years.” - -“What, you don’t mean Jean Bevoir!” broke in Dave. - -“Thet’s exactly the pusson I do mean.” - -“I shouldn’t think he’d dare to show his face around here,” said Henry. -“He must know that if he is captured it will go hard with him.” - -“An’ thet ain’t the whole o’ it,” went on Tony Jadwin. “Do ye remember -thet Frenchman as run away from Fort Pitt—the feller thet had somethin’ -to do with stealin’ them twins?” - -“You mean Benoit Vascal?” asked the trader. - -“Yes. Wall, he’s thar too, an’ he an’ Bevoir seem to be putty thick, ez -near ez I kin figger it.” - -“Father, we ought to try to capture ’em both!” burst out Dave. - -“That’s the talk,” said Henry. “Why, it will never be safe around the -trading post as long as Jean Bevoir is at large. He will incite other -Frenchmen and also Indians to do us harm.” - -“Who else is in the party?” asked James Morris of Jadwin. - -“Two other Frenchmen—trappers who used to help Bevoir—and about a dozen -Injuns—the crowd that used to be under Flat Nose.” - -“Yes, I remember that crowd,” said Dave. “They were certainly a -bloodthirsty set.” - -“Sixteen all told,” mused James Morris. “I am afraid they are too many -for us.” - -“Perhaps the Indians won’t fight,” suggested Henry. - -“They’ll fight right enough,” answered Tony Jadwin. “They have just -enough rum in them to make ’em ugly. I think Bevoir had been supplyin’ -’em with liquor.” - -“His old trick,” murmured Dave. “And it always works—with such Indians -as he gets to aid him in his dirty work.” - -The matter was talked over, and James Morris said he would take a look -at the enemy himself. Dave begged to be taken along, and his parent -consented. - -It was an easy matter to follow the trail Tony Jadwin had made. Walking -through the snow, they made no noise, and soon reached the point of -vantage the old trapper had occupied. They found the enemy encamped in -the midst of a patch of wood, with some rocks on one side. Stationing -themselves behind the rocks they readily saw and heard a good deal of -what occurred. - -The four Frenchmen spoke in French, while the Indians used their native -language. As a consequence, Dave understood but little of what was said. -But Mr. Morris could speak French fairly well, and understood much of -the red men’s dialect. He took in every word that reached his ears, and -as he listened his brow darkened. - -At the end of an hour the talk came to an end, and Indians and French -got ready to move. There were four horses in the camp, which Jean Bevoir -and his countrymen rode, leaving the Indians to accompany them on foot. -Bevoir was scarred from his wounds, and limped as he mounted his steed. - -“I ought to put a bullet through that rascal’s head!” whispered James -Morris. “He is not worthy to live.” - -“If they discover us they will surely kill us, father,” whispered Dave, -in return. “They can easily track us through the snow. Even as it is, -they may come across our tracks and follow us up.” - -“I know it, Dave—and I shall do nothing now.” - -The enemy were soon on their way, following what was a trail leading to -the far west. James Morris saw them depart with a darker look than ever -on his face. - -“The rascals! The infamous scoundrels!” he cried, when he dared to speak -in louder tones. - -“What did you learn, father?” asked the son. - -“A great deal, Dave. Do you know what Jean Bevoir intends to do?” - -“I haven’t the least idea.” - -“He and his followers, including that Benoit Vascal, are going to join -forces with a large body of Indians. They are going to induce other -Frenchmen to do likewise, if they can. The Indians are to aid the -Frenchmen in an attack on every trading post for miles around, and -whenever successful French and Indians are to divide the plunder.” - -“Well, they have done just as bad things before.” - -“That is not all. If the other Indians are finally subdued Jean Bevoir -is to take charge of my old trading post, producing a paper to the -effect that I once signed over all my rights to the place to him. To -this document the other Frenchmen will affix their names as witnesses.” - -“Oh, what a rascally thing to do!” - -“In return for aiding Jean Bevoir, Benoit Vascal is also to receive -favors,” went on James Morris. “Do you remember the papers that were -lost—those relating to Mr. Maurice Hamilton’s right to certain tracts of -land along the St. Lawrence?” - -“Of course.” - -“Well, Vascal will have duplicates made and have the rights transferred -to himself, the others being witnesses to this instrument. Thus, they -will cheat the father of the twins out of his property.” - -“But what will they do when you turn up, and when Mr. Hamilton appears?” - -“That is the most dastardly part of the whole business. They are either -going to poison us in secret or else capture us and turn us over to some -Indians, who, for a consideration, will make way with us in such a -fashion that the authorities will be completely baffled.” - -“How awful, father! How can a man like Jean Bevoir be so bloodthirsty?” - -“It is his old hatred of me grown more bitter day by day. He hated me -when first we established rival trading posts, and now he cannot bear to -think of the English winning this war against the French and Indians and -see me getting what is justly my due.” - -“And what do you intend to do about it?” - -“I do not know yet—I must think the matter over, and perhaps I will -consult with Captain Ecuyer and Colonel Bouquet. They certainly ought to -know about such dastardly plots as these.” - -Mr. Morris and Dave rejoined the others, and there told of what had been -heard. Peaceful Jones, who was in reality a most pugnacious trapper, -wanted to attack the enemy on the spot. - -“We kin mow ’em all down afore they know what’s struck ’em,” said he. -“Come on in an’ have a shindy!” - -“I will not risk it—it is asking too much of you,” answered James -Morris. “Were it necessary it would be different. Let them escape for -the time being. Another time we may be better able to cope with them.” - -From a safe distance they saw the Frenchmen and the Indians move along -the trail they had chosen. Soon the coming of night hid them from view. -Dave drew a sigh of relief. - -“I wish we could get rid of Jean Bevoir,” he said. “He has caused us so -much trouble.” - -“There is one comfort,” said his father, with a faint smile. -“‘Forewarned is forearmed.’ I know what he intends to do, and I can -accordingly lay my plans to thwart him.” - -“Do you think the French government will allow such actions?” - -“Scarcely, Dave—yet, as matters stand to-day, he may be able to explain -matters to their satisfaction. Remember, at the present time all -Frenchmen are very bitter against the English.” - -“I wish we could capture that Benoit Vascal. I am certain he can tell us -a good deal more about the twins, if he will only open his mouth.” - -“Vascal and Bevoir seem to be tarred with the same stick. Both are -rascals and will do anything to get hold of money. I am afraid we shall -have a great deal of trouble before we have seen the last of them,” -concluded James Morris, and his forecast was correct, as later events -amply proved. - - - - - CHAPTER XIV - A FIGHT WITH A WOLVERINE - - -The whole party had lost much of their interest in the hunt, and it was -decided to return to Fort Pitt without delay. They went into camp for -the night at the spot the enemy had occupied. - -“It is going to be cold to-night,” said Tony Jadwin, and his words -proved true. A keen, penetrating wind started up, and they were glad -enough to crouch as close to the fire as possible. - -After an early breakfast they started for the fort by another trail. On -this they were fortunate enough to come across three deer, caught in -something of a hollow between the rocks. Henry brought one of the -animals down and the frontiersmen shot the others. Later on Dave got a -shot at some partridges and brought down two that were plump and tender. - -“Well, we shall not go back empty-handed,” said James Morris. - -When they reached the fort they found the garrison on strict guard duty. -A report had come in from the northward that some of the Six Nations -were not going to agree on peace, but were marching to reduce the -stronghold. The report was false, but it kept those at Fort Pitt on the -watch for a week. - -Captain Ecuyer listened to James Morris’s story with interest, and when -Colonel Bouquet came in he did the same. - -“I do not see what can be done at present,” said the commandant of the -fort. “I cannot send any men out to your trading post this winter. It -may be that we can do something in the spring.” - -This was what Colonel Bouquet said also, and the trader had to accept it -as final. But the delay chafed him. - -“I have an idea of making my way to the post,” said he to his son. “I -know it will not be a very nice trip at this time of year, but I would -like to arrive there before Jean Bevoir has a chance to settle down and -make himself at home.” - -“If you go of course you will take me along,” returned Dave, instantly. - -“No, I was thinking of taking only two or three of the old trappers. You -see, if we cannot get into the post we shall have to stay in the forest -and get our living as best we can, and that will be hard,—if the winter -proves a severe one.” - -The matter was talked over for a week, but nothing came of it just then. -But at the end of the next week James Morris arranged to go west, taking -Tony Jadwin, Peaceful Jones, and a trapper named Pomeroy with him. They -elected to go on foot, taking some snowshoes with them. Each was to -carry a good stock of provisions and also plenty of ammunition. - -“If we get into the post and have no further trouble, I will send -Pomeroy back with the news and also with a letter of instructions,” said -James Morris. - -“And supposing you can’t get into the post?” said Dave. - -“Then we may stay in that vicinity, or we may come back—just as I think -best.” - -“But you will send some kind of word, won’t you?” inquired Henry. - -“Yes, I will send word of some kind before the New Year,” answered his -uncle. - -The two youths saw the expedition well on its way, going out with it a -distance of three miles. Then came an affectionate parting, and those -moving to the west were lost to view down the snowy forest trail. - -“I wish I was going along,” said Dave, with a deep sigh. - -“The same here, Dave,” answered his cousin. “But your father did not -wish it, and so we shall have to stay at the fort. I hope all goes well -with them.” - -“Yes, I shouldn’t wish father to fall into the clutches of Jean Bevoir. -Oh, how I despise that rascal!” - -The youths had decided to try a bit of hunting while they were out. -Henry led the way into the forest, and they wandered along until they -came to the tracks of some wild animal. - -“What is it?” asked Dave. - -“It stumps me,” answered his cousin. “It is certain not the track of a -deer.” - -“Maybe it’s a bear, or a buffalo.” - -“I don’t think so. But whatever it is, it was carrying something in its -mouth.” - -“How do you know that?” - -“Don’t you see the occasional dip in the snow alongside of the trail? -The load was heavy and sagged down at times.” - -“Shall we follow the trail up?” - -“I’m willing.” - -The trail led into the very depths of the great forest, and to help them -from getting lost they broke off the bushes here and there, thus -“blazing” the trail as they proceeded. In the open spaces the wind had -drifted the snow quite a little, but where the trail led the walking -proved fairly easy. - -“The animal certainly traveled a good distance,” remarked Dave, after -almost a mile had been covered. - -“We are coming to the end now,” answered Henry, whose keen eyes took in -every detail of the trail. - -“How do you know that?” - -“Don’t you see how the dips increase? That shows the load was growing -heavier. The steps are shorter too.” - -“Henry, it’s wonderful how you notice such things!” - -“Not at all. I only keep my eyes open, that’s all. Now we had better -keep quiet, or we may scare the game away.” - -After that they proceeded a short distance further. Then they reached a -clearing, where the heavy wind of the summer previous had cut down -several of the tallest trees. - -“There must have been a whirlwind here,” whispered Dave. - -“Hush, the trail leads under that mass of piled-up trees,” returned -Henry. “Got your gun ready?” - -“Yes.” - -Dave had hardly spoken when there came a snarl from under the mass of -trees, and looking down both young hunters saw a pair of gleaming eyes -glaring hatefully at them. - -“It’s a bear!” cried Dave. - -“No, a wolverine!” burst out Henry. “And an ugly one, too. Look out for -yourself.” - -Henry was indeed right; it was a wolverine they had trailed to its -lair—a ferocious beast, sometimes known as a glutton, because of its -enormous appetite for meat. The wolverine was of unusual size, with a -shaggy body of brownish-black. The muzzle was darker than the rest of -the beast, and under the throat were several whitish spots. The upper -lip hairs were long and coarse, and the fangs keener than those of a -wolf. - -The wolverine had been feasting on the carcass of a fox, but the meal -had evidently not sweetened his temper. Suddenly he turned and -disappeared from view along the tree-branches. - -“He has gone,” said Dave. - -“Keep your eyes open!” shouted Henry. “He means fight! I know the kind!” - -A moment passed and the wolverine reappeared, this time on an upper limb -of a fallen tree. He gave one low snarl and then sprang directly for -Dave’s throat. - -Crack! It was Henry’s rifle that spoke up. The aim was a hasty one, and -the wolverine was hit in the hind quarters. Dave slipped to one side, -and the beast landed at his feet. Then Dave stepped back, to get a shot, -but the beast whirled around in the snow and once more gained the -shelter of his lair. - -The two young hunters lost no time in retreating, but Henry kept Dave -from going too close to any bushes in the vicinity. - -“You can’t trust a wolverine,” he said. “Load up quick—and keep your -eyes wide open. He may be at our backs next.” - -Dave was well aware of their danger. He had heard of a hunter being -killed by a wolverine and heard Sam Barringford say that the beast was -the most treacherous of animals. If cornered a wolverine will often -fight to the death, no matter what the odds. It has been known to attack -animals much larger than itself. - -The two young hunters reloaded with speed and kept their eyes on the -fallen trees. They saw a branch move, but could not see the wolverine. -Dave, it must be confessed, began to grow a trifle nervous. - -“Do you see him?” he asked, after fully a minute had passed. - -“No, but—— There he is! Look out!” - -The wolverine had appeared on one of the highest of the tree-branches. -He made a lightning-like leap and gained one of the neighboring trees. -Dave took a quick shot, but missed his mark. Then the body of the -wolverine was hidden by the broad tree-limb. - -“Let us get out of this,” said Dave. “Before we know it, one of us will -get hurt.” - -“I am going to kill that wolverine,” answered Henry, determinedly, all -his hunting instinct on edge over what had already occurred. - -“What’s the use? He is no good for meat.” - -“The beast is not going to get the better of me.” - -Henry walked around the tree with care. He got a slight glimpse of the -wolverine’s bushy tail, but that was all. - -“Can you see him, Henry?” - -“I know where he is. I think I can make him move.” - -Henry picked up some snow, made a snowball, and threw it at the bushy -tail. There was a snarl and a snap, and down into the snow leaped the -wolverine, all ready for a fight. - -As soon as the beast landed Dave fired. As luck would have it, the -wolverine was hit in the side and turned over and over, sending the snow -in all directions. - -“I’ve got him! I’ve got him!” called out the young hunter, excitedly. - -“I reckon I’d better finish him,” answered Henry, and once again his -rifle spoke up. At once the whirling of the wolverine ceased, and he -stretched himself out on the snow. - -“My gracious! that was a fight,” observed Dave, wiping the cold -perspiration from his forehead. “I don’t wonder some folks think there -is nothing so savage as a wolverine.” - -“We want to be on guard still,” said Henry. “Load up. His mate may be -around here, and they say a she-wolverine is ten times worse than a -he-one.” - -“She’ll certainly be bad enough when she learns that we have killed her -mate.” - -“We may as well give up hunting around here,” went on Henry. “Our shots -have probably scared away any deer that may be in this vicinity.” - -“We can look for small game, Henry. I don’t want to go back -empty-handed.” - -“Listen!” - -The two young hunters were reloading, when Henry uttered the -exclamation. - -“What did you hear?” asked Dave. - -“Sounded to me like a wolf, and it was pretty close too.” - -“I hope we don’t meet any wolves in this forest!” cried Dave. - -Both listened, and soon heard three more wolves. They were coming along -the trail made by the wolverine and the youths. - -“I see them! And they are coming directly for us!” cried Dave, a minute -later, and as he spoke eight or nine wolves burst into view, coming -forward on a run, their eyes gleaming and their fangs showing viciously. - - - - - CHAPTER XV - WOLVES, AND A SNOWSTORM - - -The two young hunters knew from former experience that it would be -useless to attempt to shoot down so many wolves, and so they looked -around for some other means whereby to escape from the beasts, who were -evidently hungry and bloodthirsty. - -“Into one of the trees!” cried Henry, and slung his rifle over his -shoulder. His cousin did likewise, and both caught hold of some -tree-limbs just as the wolves drew near. One made a snap at them, but -they managed to get out of the reach of the animal before any damage was -done. - -As was to be expected, the first wolves to appear were the forerunners -of a pack, and soon, to the consternation of Dave and Henry, more of the -beasts appeared until they could count forty. They snapped and snarled, -and several fell upon the carcass of the wolverine and tore it into -pieces. - -“That’s the way they’d like to tear us into bits,” remarked Dave, with a -shudder over the sight. - -“Dave, no two ways about it, we are in a pickle.” - -“And likely to stay there for some time to come, Henry.” - -“That’s the truth of it. Trying to shoot such a pack is utterly -impossible.” - -“And I doubt if we can drive ’em away either.” - -Just to try the effects of a shot, both took careful aim, each at a big -wolf. The beasts went down, one killed outright and the other mortally -wounded. The rest of the pack retreated for a few minutes, then came -forward as before. - -“See, they are eating up the dead one!” said Henry, and it was true. The -carcass was hauled and pulled and torn apart, the wolves fighting -greedily over the pieces. The wounded wolf crawled off in the snow and -later followed the fate of the other. - -After firing the two shots the young hunters reloaded as before and sat -down among the tree-branches to consider the situation. It was about -noon, and both were hungry. - -“We are fortunate in having some rations along,” remarked Dave. “But it -will be dry eating, without a drink of water.” - -However, they ate their meal, taking their time, as there seemed nothing -else to do. In the meantime, the wolves sat around the tree in a wide -circle, watching them intently. There would be a spell of silence, then -one of the number would growl or snap and in a moment the whole pack -would be at it. Then another silence would follow. - -“This is certainly growing interesting,” observed Dave, as he swallowed -the last of his food. “I’d give a sixpence for a drink of water.” - -“And two shillings to have the wolves go away,” added Henry, with a -grin. “Dave, perhaps we are booked to stay here all night.” - -“It will be a cold roosting-place. As it is I am pretty cold.” - -To keep warm they slapped their arms across their chests, and hammered -their heels against the tree-trunk. In doing this Dave suddenly slipped -and fell. - -“Look out!” cried his cousin, and made a clutch at him. Both went down, -one on one side of a limb and one on the other. Henry had Dave by the -arm, and there they hung for a moment, with the wolves below, leaping up -and snapping as never before. - -“Don’t let go!” shrieked Dave, who had no desire to fall among those -snapping jaws waiting to receive him. - -Henry clung fast, although it was no easy matter to sustain his cousin -in such an unusual position. His wrist was twisted painfully. Then each -caught the limb with his free hand, and they both swung up to safety -once more. - -“That was a narrow squeak!” gasped Dave. “I thought the wolves had me -sure. I hope you didn’t get hurt, Henry.” - -“Got my wrist scraped a little, that’s all,” was the reply. “But please -don’t slip down again. Where’s your gun?” - -Dave felt around in dismay. Then he looked below. The strap had broken -and the weapon lay in the snow among the wolves. - -“You’ll not do any more shooting just yet,” went on Henry, grimly. - -“It’s too bad!” cried Dave. “The strap wasn’t very good, but I thought -it would hold for this trip. Look out that yours doesn’t drop, Henry.” - -“I’ll try to keep it on hand.” - -Once again there came a period of waiting. So far it had been clear, but -now it commenced to cloud over. - -“We are going to have either snow or rain,” announced Dave. - -“Well, of the two I hope it is snow,” said Henry. “I don’t want to get -wet through in such cold weather as this. It will give us our death of -cold.” - -A little while after that it began to snow. At first the flakes were -large and drifted down like so many feathers. But soon they grew smaller -and came down so thickly that a large portion of the landscape was -blotted out. Then a wind sprung up, making the situation of the young -hunters anything but comfortable. - -“The wolves are leaving!” cried Henry, presently, as an extra blast of -wind sent the snow swirling around. “They don’t like this storm. Reckon -they are afraid of being snowed in.” - -“I don’t like the storm myself,” returned his cousin. “See how thickly -the snow is coming down now.” - -Soon the last of the wolves had disappeared and silence reigned in that -part of the vast forest. With caution they let themselves down to the -ground, and Dave picked up his gun, cleaned it, and put on a new -priming. - -“We’ll have to watch out for those wolves,” he cautioned. - -“If they come for us, we can climb another tree,” answered Henry. “But I -don’t think they will turn back. Their lair may be miles from here, and -they will want to get there before they become snowbound.” - -The falling snow had covered the wolverine trail, and it was with -difficulty that they could see the bushes they had broken off while -journeying along. It was growing darker and the snow swirled and blew in -every direction, almost blinding them. - -“This will delay father,” observed Dave. “The party will have to go into -camp and stay there until the storm clears away.” - -“We may have to go into camp ourselves, Dave.” - -“Perhaps so. This puts me in mind of the time Sam Barringford and I were -journeying to Fort Oswego, and got caught in a terrible storm—the time -we got a bear.” - -“You were after Jean Bevoir then, weren’t you?” - -“Yes, we thought he had Nell as a prisoner. My, but that was a howler, -Henry!” - -“Well, this is going to be a howler, too! Listen to the wind rising!” - -There was no need to listen, for they could not have shut out the sound -had they tried. The flakes of snow had given way to fine, hard particles -resembling salt, and these pelted them in the face until they could not -see and had to turn around to catch their breath. - -“May as well give it up,” said Henry, after struggling along for almost -a mile. “Let us find some place under the cedars.” - -They had reached a spot where the cedars were plentiful, and picked out -one with the lower boughs bent down to the ground. Getting under this -they were sheltered from the biting wind, and had a chance to rest and -consider the situation. - -“One thing is certain, I don’t want to stay out all night without -something to eat and without a fire,” said Henry, who loved all the -comforts of a hunter’s life. “We must find a better shelter than this. -We can’t start a blaze here without the danger of setting fire to the -forest.” - -“I’m willing to go anywhere, providing it isn’t too far,” answered Dave. - -Having rested for half an hour they started onward once more. They soon -reached a spot that looked familiar to both of them. - -“Hurrah! I know where we are now!” cried Dave. - -“So do I, and I know where we can find a pretty good shelter,” added -Henry. - -He referred to what had once been an Indian village, long before the -French and English had come to that territory. Here, among the ruins, -was located an old council-house, of logs and bark, with a sort of -fireplace at one end. - -“At the old Indian village?” - -“Yes.” - -They hurried on, for it was now growing night. Both had their guns over -their backs, but presently Henry swung his weapon around to the front. - -“Maybe we’ll be able to pick up something for supper and breakfast,” he -observed. - -It did not take long to reach the deserted village. Nothing was standing -but the old council-house, and that was next to being a wreck. As they -stepped over the threshold they saw something hop away through an open -doorway on the other side. Quickly Henry blazed away. - -“A rabbit, and a fat one too!” he cried, holding up the game. “That is -better than nothing.” - -They stirred around and soon found a nest of the animals and killed two -more. Then they put down their guns and went out to find some firewood. -It was cold work, and they were half frozen by the time they had a blaze -started. They piled on several big sticks of wood and soon began to warm -up. - -“This is not so bad but that it might be worse,” declared Dave, while -they were preparing one of the rabbits for supper. - -Searching around they came across a small iron pot. It was rusty, but -they managed to scour it out, and then melted some snow for drinking -water. One rabbit tasted so good that they cooked a second, for the walk -and the keen air had made them tremendously hungry. They took their time -over the meal, for they had nothing else to do. - -“I think I’ll try to close up some of the openings,” remarked Henry, -after they had finished picking the bones. “We can do it with cedar -branches.” - -With their hunting knives they cut a quantity of cedar branches and -placed them in the broken-out doors and windows of the old -council-house. This kept out most of the wind, and soon the temperature -rose so that it was far more comfortable within than before. Then they -brought in some more wood for the fire, that the blaze might last -through the night. - -“I suppose this was a well-known place at one time,” observed Dave, as -he gazed around the structure. “What famous addresses the Indian chiefs -must have delivered here!” - -“Yes, and what plans they laid to massacre the whites,” replied Henry. -“If these walls could talk they could tell some cruel stories, I’m -thinking.” - -“Henry, I don’t think the Indians are altogether to blame.” - -“Why not?” - -“Because they haven’t been treated just right, that’s why. The land used -to belong to them.” - -“Humph! They never tilled it, did they? They can’t expect to let this -fine soil lie in idleness for century after century.” - -“But they had rights which neither the French nor the English have -respected.” - -“Do you stick up for such a wily wretch as Pontiac?” - -“No, but I stick up for such a noble red man as White Buffalo.” - -“Oh, well, if they were all like White Buffalo there wouldn’t be any -trouble.” - -They sat by the fire a good hour, talking about the Indians, the -departure of James Morris for the trading post, and about the folks at -home and other matters. Then they grew sleepy, and lay down to rest, -never realizing the double peril so close at hand. - - - - - CHAPTER XVI - SAVED BY A WINDSTORM - - -The two young hunters had been asleep perhaps ten minutes when a form -stole forward from behind a corner post in the old council-house. - -The form was that of a young Seneca warrior, Boka the Fox, a red man -known for miles around for his skill in hunting and fishing. No matter -who went out with him Boka the Fox usually got the biggest turkey, the -biggest deer, and very often the biggest fish. - -Boka the Fox was alone. He had been spying in the vicinity of Fort Pitt, -and was now on his way westward to report what he had seen. The storm -had overtaken him, and fancy had caused him to seek shelter in the -deserted village. He had come up just at the arrival of Dave and Henry -and had heard the gunshots when the rabbits were brought down. - -Despite the snowstorm, Boka the Fox waited around patiently for some -chance to do the whites an injury. He had only his hunting knife with -him—a weapon taken from a murdered frontiersman some months before. His -bow had been broken the day before and his tomahawk had been lost during -a wild flight to get away from some soldiers who had seen him on the -trail and fired several shots after his retreating form. - -Not to remain out in the howling storm—for the wind was growing wilder -every moment—Boka the Fox had wormed his way into a small recess close -to the rude fireplace of which this council-house boasted. I say -boasted, for the majority of such places had only an open place where a -fire might be built, the smoke rising directly to the outer air. - -In his warm corner the red warrior waited patiently for Dave and Henry -to go to sleep. Several times he was in danger of being discovered, and -he kept his hand on the handle of his knife, ready to battle the instant -he was seen. He heard every word that was spoken, but understood only a -little. - -The wind was now whistling shrilly around the old council-house, causing -the dilapidated building to creak and groan and quiver from end to end. -With so much noise, Boka the Fox stepped forward boldly to the center of -the room. The fire was still bright, and he could distinctly see the -faces of the two youths as they slept. - -[Illustration: “Boka must kill both before either awakens,” murmured the -Indian.—_Page 147._] - -“Boka must kill both before either awakens,” murmured the Indian in his -native tongue. “Then he can take their guns and all of their belongings -and fly as soon as the storm ceases.” - -He dropped the blanket he had been wearing, so that he might be free to -act, and draw himself up, knife in hand,—a tall, slim figure, with a -face full of shrewdness and treachery. - -As he took a step towards Dave the wind came up once more, shaking the -old building worse than ever. Henry turned uneasily in his sleep, and -gave a deep sigh. The Indian turned toward the youth, thinking to kill -him before he had a chance to rouse up. - -There was now a sudden spell of silence—so unusual and so impressive -that the Indian was compelled to stop in his dastardly work and listen. -It was as if the wind had ceased utterly. - -Then, with almost the quickness of lightning, came a strange humming -sound, accompanied by the cracking of trees and tree-limbs, and the -fierce pelting of hard snow as it swept along on the wings of a tornado. -The onrush of the elements was directly for the old council-house, and -in a twinkling the building was caught up and fairly blown into the air. - -“Henry!” gasped Dave, as he found himself rolled over and over in the -snow. “What in the world is this?” - -There was no answer—indeed, no answer could have been heard above that -terrible shrieking and humming of the wind. In the path of the tornado -the trees were being mowed down from one end of the forest to the other. -Branches were flying in all directions, and when Dave tried to rise he -found himself powerless to do so. He was rolled over and over again, and -at last brought up against a tree-stump, out of breath and completely -bewildered. - -Inside of five minutes the tornado was a thing of the past and the wind -died down to a moderate breeze. The fire that had been built in the old -council-house had been blown in a heap between two old tree-stumps and -was still blazing away, thus affording some light. Where the two youths -had been sleeping were half a dozen broken and twisted tree-limbs, -partly covered with snow. - -It took Dave some little time to recover his breath. He had to feel of -himself, to make sure that no limbs were broken. He looked around for -Henry, but his cousin was nowhere in sight. - -“Henry!” he called, loudly. “Where are you? Henry!” - -He repeated the cry many times, walking slowly around the wreck of the -council-house and among the trees which had been blown down in that -vicinity. At last came a faint response, and running in the direction of -the sound he found poor Henry wedged under some heavy tree-branches. - -“Tak—take them off!” gasped the prisoner. “I—I can hardly breathe.” - -To remove the big limbs was impossible, but after a good deal of -maneuvering, Dave managed to raise one branch a little and Henry crawled -through the snow from underneath. Then he sat on the branch panting for -breath. - -“It’s a windstorm,” said Dave. “About the worst I ever saw.” - -“Whe—where is the house?” - -“Gone—the wind took it up like a kite. Henry, we can be thankful that we -weren’t killed.” - -“You are right. Oh, how my breast hurts!” - -“Any ribs broken, do you think?” - -“No, I think I—I am scraped more than anything else,” answered the -injured one. - -As the fire was in a safe place, Dave stirred it up and helped Henry to -a spot where he might keep warm. Then Dave dragged some tree-branches up -in a semicircle, to keep off what little was left of the wind. - -“We’ll have to look for our guns and traps,” said Henry. “Have you any -idea where they are?” - -“They can’t be far off, Henry. But why not wait until morning?” - -“It’s not safe. Some wild animal might attack us.” - -Taking a firebrand Dave made a torch of it and began a hunt. Soon he -came across Henry’s rifle and other things. Then he brought out of the -snow a hunting knife. - -“Hullo! Whose hunting knife is this?” he asked, examining it carefully. -“Henry, you didn’t have this, did you?” - -“I did not,” was the answer. “I never saw it before. Let me see. It’s -got the initials R. D. C. on it. I don’t know anybody by those letters, -do you?” - -“Old Dick Capenfeld. He was killed by the Indians several weeks ago.” - -“I’d like to know how the knife got here.” - -The young hunters looked the blade over, and then both sat down by the -fire. Presently Henry feel asleep once more, and after a bit Dave -followed his example. - -When they awoke it was dawn, and the storm had cleared away completely. -The fire had died down, but it was easily replenished, and then both of -the youths began a systematic hunt for the rest of their belongings. -Henry declared that he felt all right, saving for a certain stiffness -across the chest, where the tree-limb had held him down. - -Dave was stirring among some heavy tree-branches when he leaped back -with a loud cry. - -“An Indian!” - -“An Indian! Where?” came from Henry, and he caught up his rifle. - -“Here—between the tree-limbs. I—I reckon he is dead.” - -Henry ran to the spot, and both of the young hunters gazed at Boka the -Fox. The tornado had caught up the Indian and landed him head first in -the branches of a tree laid low by the mighty wind. In turning over the -red warrior had been unable to save himself, and his neck had been -broken, killing him instantly. - -“This beats the kingdom!” cried Dave. “Henry, that Indian must have been -on hand when the tornado occurred!” - -“Like as not he was watching us.” - -“And maybe he was going to kill us.” - -“The finding of that hunting knife makes it look that way, Dave.” - -“Perhaps there are more near by.” - -The two young hunters looked around without delay—Henry holding his -rifle ready for use, should a warrior appear. They were greatly upset -and did not quiet down for half an hour. - -“He must have been alone,” said Henry, at last. “Where he came from -there is no telling. Well, if he was going to kill us, it was a lucky -thing that the tornado came along as it did and stopped him.” - -They continued their search in the snow and among the fallen trees, and -presently uncovered Dave’s rifle and the rest of the traps, and also the -last of the rabbits. This they spitted over the fire and ate for -breakfast. - -“Now we may as well get back to the fort—before another storm overtakes -us,” said Henry. - -“What about the Indian?” - -“Leave him where he is. I reckon the wolves will take care of him. I am -not going to bother myself on his account.” - -“I hope the tornado didn’t overtake father and his party,” went on Dave. -“It’s a wonder we weren’t killed.” - -“Yes, we can certainly be thankful,—not only because we escaped from the -windstorm, but for escaping from that Indian.” - -The wind had swept the snow into great drifts or ridges, and they knew -they would have to make wide detours in order to escape the worst of -these piles. They kicked out the fire, picked up their traps and the -blanket of the dead Indian, and set out. - -It was a hard, exhausting journey, and they often stopped to rest. On -their way they saw in the distance a small deer, stalled in a snowdrift, -and Henry could not resist the temptation to fire. The deer leaped into -the air, threw up a flurry of snow, and then disappeared from view. - -“There’s something to take to the fort!” cried the young hunter. - -“It will be all we can carry,” observed Dave. - -“What! you wouldn’t leave a deer behind, would you?” questioned Henry, -reproachfully. - -“Oh, no.” - -With care they worked their way around to where the deer had disappeared -in the snow. To do this they had to cross a hollow, where they sank up -to their waists. - -“Look out, or you’ll get stuck!” sang out Dave, and just then Henry sank -to his armpits. He floundered around a good deal before he emerged from -the hollow, blowing like a winded ox. - -The deer had fallen over a small cliff, and they had something of a task -raising it up. But at last they had the game secure, and they carried it -between them, slung on a long, slender pole. - -“Hurrah! I see the fort!” cried Dave, an hour later, as they drew to the -top of a long hill. “The worst of the trip is over.” - -He was right, and by noon they reached Fort Pitt. They were glad to rest -and eat a hearty dinner, after which they told their story. The effects -of the windstorm had been felt at the fort, but no great damage had been -done. - - - - - CHAPTER XVII - THE JOURNEY TO THE TRADING POST - - -Leaving Dave and Henry at Fort Pitt, let us shift the scene further -westward and note how James Morris and his party fared on their way -towards the trading post on the Ohio River. - -The party felt the full effects of the snowstorm, and had to go into a -temporary camp. The wind, however, hardly touched them, and they were -left in ignorance of the great damage done in other directions. - -“’Tis lucky we brought our snowshoes with us,” said Peaceful Jones. -“With such a fall, most of our traveling will have to be with the shoes -on.” - -They had gone into camp under some overhanging rocks, where a big fire -had kept them warm. The old trappers had brought down a deer and some -rabbits, so they did not suffer for the want of food, having brought -along two slabs of bacon, some beans and flour, and likewise a few -cooking utensils. - -On the morning after the snowstorm they set off early, and by the middle -of the afternoon found themselves ten miles further on their journey in -the direction of the post. It had been hard work to travel on the -snowshoes, over a trail which was all but obliterated, and Pomeroy -requested that they rest again. - -“I’ve been a-loafin’ around thet fort so much I ain’t got my walkin’ -legs yit,” was the manner in which he expressed himself. “Maybe I’ll hev -’em by ter-morrer.” - -“I fancy we all need the rest,” answered James Morris. “I am stiff -myself. We’ll get used to the snowshoes in a day or two.” - -They searched for another resting-place, and James Morris found a spot -he had used for that purpose when he had first gone west—to establish -himself on the Kinotah. - -“That seems a long time ago,” said the trader, to Tony Jadwin. “And -think of all that has happened since! The war with France, and the -capture of Fort Pitt, Niagara, Quebec, Montreal, and a number of other -places, and then this war with Pontiac and the tribes under him. Surely, -Tony, we can be thankful that we live to tell about it.” - -“Yes,” answered the trapper addressed. “And think of the fights at the -old trading post and then at the new one! And we ain’t done yet, I am -sorry to say.” - -“Sometimes I wonder if it is worth all the trouble and risk”, continued -James Morris. “I have gained a little, but it has cost me dear.” - -“I’d never give in to the Indians or to them Frenchmen, Mr. Morris. Why, -if you give ’em a pound they’ll want a thousand.” - -“I know that.” - -“The land in the west belongs to the English now, and a fair share of it -is yours. Those Indians and those Frenchmen have got to leave us alone, -an’ the sooner they learn the lesson the better,” concluded Tony Jadwin. - -The new resting-place was where some tall trees grew on the very edge of -a cliff. One tree had fallen, and its gigantic roots hung over the -cliff, forming a network over which it was easy to place some pine -branches. As the cliff was hollowed out just beyond the trees, this left -a space about eight feet deep by twenty feet long where they could make -themselves comfortable. Against the rocks they built a fire, the smoke -escaping through some crevices. They cooked themselves a haunch of -venison and some beans and biscuits, and took their own time about -eating. All went to sleep as soon as it grew dark, knowing that a long, -hard tramp lay before them at daybreak. - -The travelers were destined not to be allowed to rest undisturbed. James -Morris slept several hours when he was awakened by having a cold nose -pressed against his face. He opened his eyes and sat up and at the same -instant heard a low growl. - -“A bear!” he yelled, as loudly as he could. “A bear! Two of them!” - -The trader was right—two full-grown bears had entered the camp, -evidently attracted by the smell of venison and bacon. As James Morris -arose the bears retreated to another part of the shelter, one stepping -directly upon Peaceful Jones. - -“Git orf o’ me, ye sinner!” gasped the frontiersman, wrathfully. “Git -orf, I say!” And then as the bear backed away, he reached for his rifle -and tried to take aim. But Mr. Morris was in the way, and he did not -dare to pull the trigger. - -By this time the whole camp was in an uproar. Tony Jadwin tried to rise, -but just as he did so one of the bears ran against him, pitching him -down in such a fashion that one hand went into the smoldering fire. - -“Great hamstrings!” roared the trapper, wiping the hot ashes from his -hand. “What’s this mean? Two b’ars, eh? Shoot ’em, somebody! Shoot em!” - -The bears were now evidently as much frightened as those who had been -asleep, and tumbling against the rocks and the tree-roots they got out -of the shelter and ran off along a stretch which the wind had swept -clear of snow. The commotion made some dirt and snow fall on the fire, -practically extinguishing it. - -“Stir up that fire, Pomeroy,” said James Morris, as soon as something -like quietness had been restored. The man addressed did so and piled on -some light brushwood, so that they might look around them. They found -much in disorder, and soon made the discovery that the bears had carried -off every pound of the meat. - -“They didn’t do it just now,” said Tony Jadwin. “They must have made two -trips o’ it. Likely they didn’t get enough the first time. Drat the -luck, anyway! We kin shoot some more venison, but we can’t git no bacon, -an’ bacon is what I like best.” In those days deer meat was so plentiful -among the hunters that many grew tired of eating it, just as many -farmers to-day get tired of eating chickens. - -Had it been daylight some of the party would have been in favor of -following the bears up and shooting them. But this was voted out of the -question in the darkness, and so they retired once more, leaving one -man, however, to remain on guard and attend to the fire. - -The next day the weather remained clear and the sun made the snow pack -down a trifle, so that it became easier to walk on snowshoes. The route -lay over several hills and then along a frozen watercourse where the ice -was as smooth as glass. - -“You want to be careful here”, observed Pomeroy. “This ice ain’t so hard -as it looks. We ain’t had much winter, outside o’ the snowstorm.” - -They followed the stream until they came to a bend, and then started to -cross over. Tony Jadwin was in advance, when he heard a shout from -Peaceful Jones. - -“A deer!” - -All looked and saw the deer, but a long distance off. Anxious to get a -shot, Peaceful Jones started along the river bank on the icy snow. He -had gone only a few steps, when they suddenly saw him throw up his hands -and disappear from view. - -“Hello! What does that mean?” exclaimed James Morris. “Was he shot?” - -“Either thet or he went through a hole,” answered one of the other men. - -All brought their rifles around, ready for use, and then started toward -the spot where the trapper had disappeared so suddenly. They saw a hole -in the snow. - -“He is down there!” cried James Morris. “Come, we must get him out.” - -[Illustration: “I think we had better take turns watching,” said -Henry.—_Page 49._] - -This was easier said than done. The hole was ten or twelve feet deep. -The men on the surface of the snow joined hands, and thus held James -Morris from falling in as the trader bent over the hole. Looking down, -he could see Jones below, spluttering wildly. - -“Sa—sa—save me!” were his first words. The man was so chilled that he -could do scarcely more than chatter. - -“We will,” answered James Morris. - -He directed the last man on the line to pass forward a rifle, and he -took hold of the barrel of this, while he allowed Peaceful Jones to -grasp the stock. Then James Morris began to pull, and Peaceful Jones -came up, over the edge of the hole, and was quickly drawn to a place of -safety. - -The man was so chilled that the others lost no time in building a big -fire, in the meantime covering him with a blanket. Then, while he was -getting warm, Pomeroy went fishing with a stick and some lines, and -after a lot of trouble succeeded in bringing up Jones’s rifle. - -“I was a-lookin’ at the deer, an’ didn’t see the hole,” was the -explanation the trapper gave of his mishap. “After this I’ll look whar -I’m steppin’.” - -“Ye had better,” was Pomeroy’s comment. “’Cos it might be as thar -wouldn’t be nobuddy around to help ye out ag’in!” - -The river left behind, they passed on directly to the region where the -first trading post had been located. This was still suffering from the -effects of the burn-over, although here and there a few trees and bushes -had sprouted out during the past summer. - -“It was a fine spot,” said James Morris, as he stood and surveyed the -site of the old post. “A fine spot. But it is no good now, and will not -be for years to come.” - -“As good as it was, the site of the new post is better,” answered Tony -Jadwin. “In fact, I think that the new spot is the finest in this -section of the country.” - -“And I suppose that is why Jean Bevoir wishes to get possession of it,” -went on the trader, with a trace of bitterness in his tones. - -“Jean Bevoir knows a good thing when he sees it,” said Peaceful Jones. -“He’s about ez wise ez he is wicked.” - -“I think his party must have passed this way,” put in Pomeroy, who had -been walking around. “Thar’s been a camp in yonder trees not long ago—I -kin tell it by the fresh-burnt sticks.” - -“Perhaps some Indians have been here,” said James Morris. “Bevoir and -his followers must have reached the trading post long ago.” - -“Not if they were stopped on the way.” - -At this remark a sudden hope sprang into the breast of the trader. - -“It would be a fine thing if he had been stopped and we could get there -first!” he cried. “But I am afraid that is hoping for too much. However, -let us not linger here, but move forward at once.” - -The others were willing, and without delay the journey down to the Ohio -was resumed. Every foot of the way was familiar to all of the party, and -one or the other took the lead, over trails which their feet had trod in -times of war as well as in peace. - -“The Ohio at last!” said James Morris, at noon of the next day. “I am -glad to see this broad stream once more.” - -They were now within a few miles of the trading post, and all hurried -forward with much interest, curious to learn what they should find when -they arrived there. - - - - - CHAPTER XVIII - RUNNING INTO A TRAP - - -“There is the post!” - -It was James Morris who said this. He was slightly in advance of the -others, and coming around a bend of the Ohio River caught sight of the -place which had cost him so much hard work to establish. - -As my old readers know, the trading post proper was a substantial -building of heavy logs, containing four rooms, the main one of which was -usually devoted to trading with the trappers and Indians. Near by was a -storehouse of two rooms, with a stable attached for horses and cattle. - -The site of the trading post was a small bluff fronting the broad Ohio, -and not far away was a gurgling brook, with some rough rocks beyond. The -buildings and grounds were surrounded by a strong palisade of sharpened -logs, containing, at a convenient point, a gate ten feet in width, -locked by two heavy crossbars. The palisade contained many loopholes for -shooting purposes in case of attack. Around the outside of the palisade -the ground had been cleared for a short distance, but otherwise, -excepting for the river, the unbroken forest stretched for many miles. -To-day this same locality is dotted with rich farms and villages, with a -railroad running through it, and where the canoes of Indians and white -hunters used to ride there now plow steamboats and tugboats. And yet -this was but a hundred and forty-odd years ago! What wonderful strides -our country is making, and who can imagine what the next hundred and -forty years will bring forth? - -James Morris called a halt, and all gathered around him, wondering what -the next move was to be. They looked toward the trading post. The great -gate of the palisade was wide open and there appeared to be no sign of -life anywhere. - -“Looks deserted, don’t it?” remarked Tony Jadwin. He had helped to erect -the place and knew every nook and corner as well as did its owner. - -“It certainly does,” answered James Morris. “But we must not take too -much for granted.” - -“’Pears like I kin see tracks in the snow, near the gate,” remarked -Peaceful Jones. “What do ye think on’t, Pomeroy?” - -“Some tracks thar certain, but the wind has swept ’em so ye can’t tell -ef they belong to man or beast.” - -“Let us walk through the forest and look at the other side of the -place,” said James Morris, and this was done. Try their best they could -see nobody, and from the branches of a tree Tony Jadwin announced that -the door to the main building stood wide open. - -“Then it’s empty,” said Pomeroy. “Because, if anybuddy war thar, they’d -shet it in sech weather as this.” - -At last James Morris concluded to venture through the gate, and did so, -gun in hand, and followed by the others. A look around the broad grounds -revealed nobody, and with a heart that beat strangely, the trader -advanced toward the main building. - -“Ho! Within there!” he called out, sharply. - -He waited, but there was no answer, nor did anybody appear. - -“Reckon we’ve got it all to ourselves,” said Pomeroy. “Either Bevoir an’ -his crowd ain’t got here yit, or else they are out on a hunt, or -somethin’ else.” - -“I’ll soon make sure,” said Tony Jadwin, and entered the main building, -and James Morris followed him. It was rather dark within, and for the -moment they could see next to nothing. Jadwin walked to one side of the -room, while the trader stepped to the doorway of the next room. In the -meanwhile Pomeroy entered also, leaving only Peaceful Jones outside. - -It was then that the scene changed as if by magic. From several places -of concealment Jean Bevoir, Benoit Vascal, and a number of Indians under -Moon Eye leaped forth and fell upon the three newcomers. James Morris -was sent flat on the floor, face downward, so that he could not use his -gun, and Tony Jadwin received a blow from a club that stretched him -lifeless. Two Indians pounced upon Pomeroy, who uttered a loud cry for -assistance. A moment later a tomahawk split Pomeroy’s skull in twain, -killing him instantly. - -Peaceful Jones ran forward and was just in time to see Pomeroy go down, -with the hatchet still sticking in his head. He fired at one of the -Indians, shooting him through the heart. Then a rifle rang out within -the building, and Peaceful Jones felt a bullet graze his shoulder. - -“Come on out o’ thet!” he roared. “This is too hot fer us!” - -“Save yourself!” came faintly from James Morris. “We are trapped! They -mean to massacre us!” - -His cries were cut short by two pistol shots. Then followed sounds of -several blows, and James Morris appeared at the doorway, his face -covered with blood. He took one more step forward, and with a gasp sank -down in a heap. - -From the storehouse now poured half a dozen Indians, armed with bows and -arrows and tomahawks. Realizing that it would be useless to fight such a -number of the enemy, and satisfied in his own mind that all of his -companions were either killed or mortally wounded, Peaceful Jones turned -and ran for the rear of the main building. Three arrows whizzed beside -him, and a bullet from a pistol flew close to his ear. - -“After heem! He must not escape!” came in the voice of Jean Bevoir. “Ve -must keel dem all!” - -Reaching the back of the main building, Peaceful Jones did not pause. In -the snow lay some brushwood, and he caught up a branch of this, and, -holding it behind him, continued to run. Two more arrows were sent after -him and lodged in the tree-branch, thus saving him from further injury. - -As he came close to the corner of the palisade he wondered what he had -best do next. The Indians were after him hot-footed and so was one of -the Frenchmen. He felt that to make a stand would mean certain death. - -He had thus far gained a spot used the year before for sawing and -splitting wood. A big saw-buck was still standing there, and he picked -it up with ease and continued to run. Reaching the palisade, he stood -the saw-buck up on one end and climbed to the top. - -“Stop!” roared a voice, in French, and a rifle rang out. The bullet this -time struck Peaceful Jones in the left shoulder, inflicting an ugly and -painful wound. He gave a grunt, mounted the sharp points of the -palisade, and dropped outside. Then, with all the strength that was left -to him, he started for the nearest patch of timber, sixty yards distant. -As he entered the timber some more arrows flew towards him, but went shy -of their mark. - -The trapper was now weak from the loss of blood, which was flowing down -from his shoulder to his hand. But he staggered on, knowing that he now -had no time to stop and bind up his wound. He rushed straight into the -forest and staggered onward until he came to a clump of low-branched -trees. Then, to “cut the trail,” as it was called, he pulled himself up -into the trees by his uninjured arm and climbed from one tree to -another, and so on, until a hundred feet had been covered. Then he -dropped on some rocks, which the wind had swept clear of snow, and went -forward as before, gritting his teeth, to keep himself from fainting -from loss of blood. - -It was well for Peaceful Jones that night was coming on, and in the -depths of the forest it was growing dark. Plucky though he was to the -last degree, he was but human, and now felt that he might drop from -sheer exhaustion at any moment. He looked for some sort of a -hiding-place, and reaching a cedar tree growing in a split of the rocks, -dove under it. - -For a good quarter of an hour the trapper did little but hold his hand -tightly over his wound and pant for breath, leaning against the tree in -the meanwhile with eyes closed. He could do nothing more to save -himself, and was in that condition of mind when capture or escape meant -little or nothing to him. - -But as his breath came back to him, and none of the Indians or Frenchmen -appeared, a spark of hope came to his breast. He tore off his heavy coat -and his hunting shirt and examined the wound from which he had suffered -the most. The bullet had passed directly through the flesh and some lint -was sticking in the wound. He took out the lint, cleaned the wound with -soft snow, and bound it up as best he could with a handkerchief and a -bandage he carried for emergencies. Then he drew on his hunting shirt -once more and his coat, closed his eyes, and fell back in a sort of -stupor. - -It was pitch-dark when Peaceful Jones came to himself once more. At a -distance he heard a murmur of voices. Some Indians and a Frenchman were -holding a conversation. - -“I can see nothing of a trail,” said one of the Indians, in his native -tongue. “I doubt if he came this way.” - -“He must not be allowed to get away,” said the Frenchman, also in the -Indian tongue. “Dead men are best, since they tell no tales.” - -“Are the others all dead?” asked another Indian. - -“Dead or dying.” - -“It was lucky that Moon Eye discovered their coming in time,” said the -first Indian who had spoken. “We set a nice trap for them.” - -The Indians and the Frenchman continued to talk, in the meantime moving -away from the cedar tree, so that Peaceful Jones made out no more of the -conversation. He himself could speak the Indian language and understood -every word that had been spoken. - -The news filled his heart with grief. All his companions were either -dead or dying and the enemy were doing their best to find and slay him. -He felt that only by the help of Providence would he be enabled to -escape. He was not a very religious man, but he breathed a silent prayer -to Heaven that he might be spared, if for no other purpose than to carry -the sad news back to Fort Pitt. - -An hour went by, and the Indians and the Frenchman left the vicinity -entirely. But then came something else to disturb and alarm him. - -A small bear stepped into view, sniffing the air suspiciously. His den -was among the rocks close to the cedar under which the hunter was -resting. He came forward slowly, as if knowing by instinct that all was -not right. - -At first Peaceful Jones was alarmed, then a sudden grim smile came to -his bronzed features. He drew his long hunting knife and waited for the -bear to come within striking distance. - -“Your life or mine—an’ it ain’t goin’ to be me ef I kin help it,” he -muttered to himself. - -The bear came to the cedar and pushed a branch aside with his nose. Like -lightning, Peaceful Jones leaped forward and made a plunge with his -hunting knife. Then the blade was withdrawn and slashed rapidly across -the animal’s throat. There was a grunt, a gasp, and the animal fell down -in its tracks, gave a convulsive shudder, and lay dead. - -Weak as he was, the old trapper managed to draw the game under the cedar -and kicked some fresh snow over the spot where the blood had flowed. -Then he took his hunting knife, cut out a piece of bear meat, and began -to suck and gnaw upon it like some wild animal. It was a primitive meal, -and might have made another person sick, but it satisfied him and gave -him strength,—and strength was what he needed above anything else. - -The morning brought a light snowstorm, for which he was thankful, since -it would cover up his tracks. As soon as he felt able to do so, he cut -himself a big chunk of the bear meat, slung it over his shoulder, and -set off, in the direction of the Kinotah. He plunged directly into the -great forest, afraid to take to any of the trails leading eastward for -fear he would run into the enemy once again. - - - - - CHAPTER XIX - THE SHOOTING CONTEST - - -To Dave and Henry, left at Fort Pitt, the days passed slowly. -Occasionally they went out hunting, with fair success, but, warned by -Captain Ecuyer, did not venture far away. They waited patiently for some -word from Rodney, and some word from Dave’s father, but no news came to -them. - -“I hope Rodney got home in safety,” said Henry, one day. “I don’t see -why we don’t hear from him.” - -“I wish father would send some word,” answered Dave. “I am beginning to -grow anxious.” - -October slipped into November, and winter was now on them in earnest. It -snowed a great deal, and Fort Pitt was cut off from communication in all -directions. The soldiers scarcely knew what to do with themselves, and -the settlers who had gone to the stronghold for protection were also -weary of the confinement. - -To pass the time some of the men one day got up a shooting contest, and -asked Dave and Henry to join. The youths were willing, and paid the -admission fee, two shillings. The first prize was a silver mug, the -second prize a fancy bullet-mold, and the third a new hunting knife. - -Among the soldiers to participate in the contest were two named Gasway -and Pelton. Both were beefy Englishmen, from London, who had come over -the year before. Each was given to boasting, and each felt certain of -winning either the first or the second prize. - -“What! you boys going to compete!” cried Gasway, to Dave, disdainfully. -“Sure, ’twill be good money thrown away.” - -“Perhaps we’ll not do so badly,” said Dave, nettled by Gasway’s superior -manner. - -“The first prize will go to me and the second to my friend Pelton,” went -on the English soldier. “I take it you chits will be at the end of the -list.” - -Left to himself, Dave sought out his cousin and told him what Gasway had -said. Henry smiled grimly. - -“He had better do his crowing after the shooting, not before, Dave.” - -“I wish we could beat him, and beat Pelton, too.” - -“Well, we can try.” - -The contest was to come off on the following afternoon. The day proved -clear, and a goodly number of those stationed at the fort gathered to -witness the shooting. The target, a large affair of wood, with several -rings and a bull’s-eye, was nailed to a tree, and a stump marked the -spot where each contestant must stand while shooting. Each contestant -was to have three shots, and the highest possible score was eighteen -points. - -The first soldier to shoot, a man named Pepperley, made two points with -his first shot. Another made three, and another five. Then came Gasway, -who made five also, and Pelton, who made six. - -“Now, Dave,” said Henry, and Dave stepped to the front, took careful -aim, and pulled the trigger. - -“Four!” announced the officer who was keeping the tally. - -Dave was a trifle disappointed, as he had hoped to make at least five. -Yet he managed to smile as he turned to Henry. - -“You can do better than that, I know,” he said. - -Two other marksmen now came to the front, making four each. Then it was -Henry’s turn. - -The youth took his time about shooting, and when the smoke cleared away -a shout went up: - -“A bull’s-eye for Henry Morris!” - -“Good—that counts six for you, Henry!” exclaimed Dave. - -[Illustration: “A bull’s-eye for Henry Morris!”—_Page 176._] - -Soon the men were shooting for the second time. Dave got a bull’s-eye -and Henry a five, giving them 10 and 11 respectively. Strange to say -Gasway and Pelton also scored 10 and 11, so the friends on each side -were a tie. The other marksmen got from 8 to 10 each. - -Those to make the highest scores were to shoot last, and as a -consequence Dave was pitted against a soldier named Brocaw and against -Gasway, while Henry was pitted against Pelton. - -Brocaw was the first to shoot and made a four, much to his disgust. - -“You go next,” said Gasway to Dave. - -“Toss up for it,” said the officer who was judging the contest, and the -toss of a penny sent Gasway to the front. He was a trifle nervous and -took so long to shoot that some friends jeered at him. - -“Five!” called out the judge, when the shot had been taken. - -“Now, Dave, make a bull’s-eye!” cried Henry. - -It must be confessed that Dave was also nervous, although he did his -best to conceal it. This time he raised his rifle quickly and blazed -away before anybody expected it. - -“A bull’s-eye, sure enough!” - -“That gives him two points above Brocaw and one point above Gasway!” - -The toss of the penny now brought Pelton to the front, and he shot with -great care, yet all he could make was a five, which gave him a total of -16 points, just what Dave had. - -“Now, Henry, a bull’s-eye sure,” said Dave. - -“More likely he’ll make a three,” sneered Gasway. He was disgusted -because of his own showing. - -Henry was cool, for his nerves seldom bothered him. He took aim with -great deliberation, and hit the target exactly in the center. - -“Seventeen points for Henry Morris!” was the cry. - -“He takes the first prize!” - -“He certainly can shoot, even if he is young.” - -It was decided that Dave Morris and Ike Pelton should have one more shot -each, the one coming nearest to the center of the target taking the -second prize and the other taking the third prize. The toss made Pelton -shoot first. All of the other shots on the target were chalked over, so -that there might be no mistakes in scoring. - -This time Pelton took more care than ever in shooting, and as a -consequence put his bullet directly on the inner ring,—something which, -though between 5 and 6, would count the higher number. - -“I fancy the youngster can’t beat that,” said Gasway. - -“Don’t be so sure,” answered a soldier who favored Dave. - -Dave’s heart thumped loudly in his breast as he stepped up beside the -tree-stump. But he kept outwardly calm and did what he could to steady -his arms. He took one good look at the target, raised his rifle, and -fired. The smoke cleared away and there was a second of silence. - -“A miss!” - -“What!” cried Dave and Henry, in a breath. - -“The bullet does not seem to have touched the target,” announced the -judge. - -“Oh, I must have hit the target!” went on Dave. “Why, I aimed as -carefully as before, when I made 16 in three shots.” - -“Can’t help it. The target has not been touched. You can see for -yourself.” - -Dave ran forward, and so did all of the others. There was Pelton’s shot -and all of the others’, each marked with chalk. - -“I know wot he did!” shouted one old frontiersman. - -“And so do I!” added Henry, triumphantly. “It’s been done before, too.” - -“What?” came in a chorus. - -“His bullet is on top of mine, directly in the center of the -bull’s-eye.” - -“Can that be possible?” cried the officer in charge. “We’ll soon see.” - -He got out his penknife and began to dig at the hole in the middle of -the target. Soon one bullet came up, and another was revealed beneath -it. - -“Dave Morris gets the second prize, and Pelton takes third!” - -“And Gasway and the others get nothing,” said one of the soldiers. -“Gasway, maybe you won’t blow so much after this.” - -“Bah! The shooting didn’t amount to much anyway!” growled Gasway, and -lost no time in getting out of sight. But he never said anything more to -Dave or Henry about target shooting, nor did Pelton mention the subject. - -After that Henry was urged to try his hand at long-distance shooting. To -please his friends he complied, and made several remarkable shots, which -called forth praise from Captain Ecuyer and many others. - -“I know of nobody who can shoot better than you,” said the commandant of -the fort. - -“I know one man who can—the man who taught me,” answered the youth. - -“And who is he?” - -“Sam Barringford. I don’t know if he can do any better at a target, but -he can best me in shooting at running game or flying birds. He is -remarkably quick that way.” - -“But you must be able to hit a bird on the wing.” - -“I can generally. Once in a while I miss,” answered Henry. - -“But not often,” said Dave. “He is the best hunter in our family, by a -good deal,” he added, warmly. - -“Well, you can do a little too,” said Captain Ecuyer, with a laugh. - -The shooting had taken place in a clearing behind Fort Pitt. The party -was about to return to the fort, when a sudden shouting was heard. - -“What is the matter?” asked Captain Ecuyer, quickly. - -“Somebody is coming down the trail!” - -“A messenger! A messenger!” was the cry. - -“It is Peaceful Jones!” - -The report proved true; it was indeed Peaceful Jones who was coming -along the trail leading from the west. He walked slowly, as if very -tired or full of pain. - -“Let’s go to meet him!” cried Dave, and ran forward, followed by Henry -and half a dozen others. It did not take them long to reach the trapper, -who, as soon as he saw them, stopped short and clutched a tree for -support. - -“What is it, Jones?” asked Henry, and then started, as did Dave, for -they saw the man was very thin, as if he had suffered from a long -illness. - -“Thank Heaven I—I am ba—back at last!” gasped Peaceful Jones. “I -th—thought I’d never ma—make it!” - -“You are sick—you have been hurt!” burst out Dave, and helped to support -him. - -“Yes—got shot—Bevoir’s crowd—got away—sick—lost in forest—Indians—old -medicine man—got away again—come here—and now——” Peaceful Jones could -not go on. - -“You were shot?” queried Dave; “and by Bevoir’s crowd? What of my -father?” And the youth’s heart seemed to stop beating. - -“Dead—everybody is dead but me, and I—I—oh!” And then Peaceful Jones -dropped limply into the arms of Dave and Henry. His eyes closed, and for -the time being he knew no more. - -“He has fainted from exhaustion,” said an under officer who had come up. -“Carry him to the fort, and we will do what we can to revive him. He -must have important news to tell.” - -“Yes,” said Dave, brokenly. The mist was swimming before his eyes. “Oh, -Henry, can this be true? Can father be dead?” - -“Let us hope for the best,” answered his cousin. He, too, could hardly -speak. - -Then some soldiers raised Peaceful Jones to their shoulders and marched -off to the fort with him. Dave and Henry followed in their rear, each -with a heart that sank lower and lower at every step. - - - - - CHAPTER XX - ANOTHER LONG JOURNEY - - -For several hours Peaceful Jones lay in a stupor of pain and exhaustion. -He was given the best medical attention the fort afforded, and at last -dropped into a deep sleep, from which he did not awaken until the next -day. He was then still weak, but able to tell his story in detail. - -Much of it we already know. After leaving the vicinity of the cedar with -his bear meat over his shoulder he had wandered around in the woods and -gotten lost. Then he had been snowed in for over a week, and at the end -of that period had been taken down with a fever, and had come out of it -to find himself in an Indian camp and under the care of a medicine man -for whom he had once done a favor. The medicine man told him that some -other Indians wished to kill him, and at the first opportunity the -trapper had fled from the Indian village and started again for Fort -Pitt. He had fallen over some rocks into a hollow while on the last -three miles of his journey and was so weak that he could hardly stand -when discovered by his friends. - -“But are you certain the others were all killed—that my father was -killed?” asked Dave. - -“He must be dead, Dave—although I didn’t see him go down. I was outside -of the tradin’ post. But I heard a Frenchman and an Indian speak about -it. They were more than anxious to kill me too.” - -“Oh, I cannot believe that father is dead!” burst out the youth, and had -to turn away to hide his tears. - -Henry did what he could to comfort his cousin, but was himself much -downcast. That evening the pair talked the matter over for several -hours, but the discussion did not appear to help the situation. - -“I wish we could get Colonel Bouquet or Captain Ecuyer to march against -Jean Bevoir,” said Dave. “That Frenchman and his associates ought to be -shot down or hanged.” - -“I don’t think either the colonel or the captain will want to go out -during the winter,” answered Henry, which was a correct conclusion. The -season was proving so severe that the idea of sending a body of soldiers -on a trail that was then but little known was out of the question, in -the opinion of both the colonel and the commandant of the fort. Both -said nothing could be done until spring. - -“I don’t believe they will ever send the soldiers out there,” said Dave -to Henry, with much bitterness in his tone. “They think they have their -hands full taking care of matters as far west as this fort.” - -“Well, we can’t exactly blame them, Dave. They have had some hard times -here, during the past few years.” - -“But do you want to stay here and let Bevoir and his crowd escape -punishment?” - -“I certainly do not. But what can we do? It would be foolhardy for us to -dream of going out there alone.” - -“We might go home and organize a party from there. I think your father -would help us.” - -“That is a roundabout way of getting at it,” answered Henry, -thoughtfully. “But it could be done.” - -“I can’t bear to think of staying here and doing nothing,” resumed Dave. -“Why, every day would seem like a month! I must know the truth, and I -must do something to bring Jean Bevoir and those other rascals to -justice.” - -With Dave, to think was to act, and by the next day he had made up his -mind fully. He would return to Will’s Creek, tell his Uncle Joe and the -others all, and get them to aid him in organizing an expedition to move -against Jean Bevoir and his evil associates. - -The commandant of the fort was much surprised at the youth’s -determination and secretly admired his pluck. Yet he shrugged his -shoulders over the wisdom of the plan. - -“’Tis a long journey to the east and ’twill be a longer journey to the -west,” he said. “However, have your own way, and I will aid you as much -as I can.” - -It was arranged that two frontiersmen named Lawson and Devine should -accompany Dave and Henry on their journey eastward. The four were to go -on foot, taking along snowshoes, and each was to carry a knapsack well -filled with rations. They were to move along as quickly as possible, -only stopping to shoot game when it was absolutely necessary. - -Lawson and Devine were fairly well known to the youths. Each had been -over the trail a number of times, and each was stout and strong and well -able to resist the hardships of the trip. All went over their outfits -with care, and did not carry anything more than seemed absolutely -necessary. - -The start was made from Fort Pitt on a bright clear day in the middle of -December. A few of the soldiers went out to see them off, and to the -first bend in the trail. Then they turned back, and the party of four -was left to confront whatever lay before it. - -“I do not think we shall meet any Indians,” said Henry. “They do not -fancy moving around in such nipping weather as this.” - -“Keep your eyes open, is what I say,” answered Lawson, who was striding -along in advance. “An Injun ain’t going to announce his coming with -bells and a horn.” - -For the first few miles of the journey but little was spoken, the -frontiersmen being of a silent turn of mind and Dave and Henry being -busy with their thoughts. They were following the old Braddock road, -thinking they might make better progress on this through the heavy snows -than on the General Forbes route. - -“I am afraid, if we push ourselves too much the first day, we’ll be -rather stiff the second,” remarked Henry, as they stopped for a minute -on a rise of ground to get their breath. - -“Oh, I want to make as many miles as I possibly can,” answered Dave -impatiently. - -“I agree with Henry,” said Devine. “We’ll have to take it a bit easier. -We’ll gain by it in the end, mark my words.” - -That night they encamped in a snug spot among the rocks. Plenty of -firewood was handy, and they built up a roaring blaze. On the way Henry -had seen a bunch of rabbits and had not resisted the temptation to take -a shot. He had secured three, and these were cooked to a turn and eaten, -after which they turned in without delay, each taking his turn at -standing guard and keeping up the fire. - -The next day was largely a repetition of the first, and the third day -was on the same order, although Lawson saw a deer and shot at it, -breaking its leg. Dave gave the game a finishing bullet, and they took -the meat to their next camping spot. There the deer was cut up, and each -was given a good-sized piece to carry along. - -“That ought to last us several days,” said Lawson. “So we won’t have to -waste time or powder on more stuff for the larder.” - -The next day, about noon, came an alarm. Turning a bend of the trail -they came in sight of fully a score of Indians, all on snowshoes and -journeying in the direction of Fort Pitt. - -“Out of sight!” warned Lawson, and leaped behind some bushes, followed -by his companions. - -“I think they saw us first,” said Henry. “And if so, it will do us small -good to hide.” - -He had hardly spoken when a shrill whistle filled the air, followed by a -cry that was well known to Dave and Henry. At once both boys ran out -into the road. - -“White Buffalo!” cried Dave, and moved onward to greet the aged chief. - -“Where goes my young friend?” questioned White Buffalo. - -“I am going home,” answered Dave, and then told of what had happened at -the trading post. White Buffalo was much concerned. - -“’Tis sad news indeed,” said he. “And comes at a time when White -Buffalo’s heart was filled with gladness.” - -“What has happened to make you glad?” asked Henry. - -“My tribe is at peace once more. Henceforth all of our warriors will be -friendly to the English. And they have made me the chief of all my -people.” - -“I am glad of that, for your sake!” cried Dave. “And you deserve this, -White Buffalo, for you are the very best Indian I know.” - -“White Buffalo wishes he could aid his friend Dave,” said the Indian. -“But now he must journey to the home of the Delawares, to prepare for -the great ceremonial. But when he is at liberty he will follow Dave, and -bring with him some of his best braves.” - -“I’ll be glad of that, White Buffalo.” - -“If Bevoir and his curs have slain Dave’s father and his friends they -must suffer for it,” went on the aged chief. “And the trading post -belongs to Dave and his people,” he added, firmly. “Neither the French -nor the red men can have it.” - -A talk lasting an hour followed, and White Buffalo said again that -sooner or later he would aid Dave. How he kept his word we shall see in -a later chapter. - -The Indians went on their way, and once again Dave and the others turned -their faces eastward. Nothing more happened to alarm them, and thus they -went on for two days more. - -“We’ll soon be there,” said Dave. “We ought to strike one of the -settlements in a day or two.” They had certainly pushed ahead with -rapidity, as their strained and tired legs testified. - -That night they encamped among some trees, and in the morning found -everything covered with snow. The snow was still coming down steadily. - -“We are not going to do so well to-day,” said Henry. “We must take care, -or we’ll get off the trail.” - -“Trust me to keep to the trail,” said Lawson. “I know the ground too -well to get lost.” - -It was indeed hard to go on, and by noon they were glad enough to stop -for a long rest. The wind was biting cold and the temperature was going -down rapidly. - -“Unless I miss my guess we’re going to have an awful night,” remarked -Devine. “The best thing we can do is to find some good shelter before it -gets too dark.” - -They pushed on from two o’clock to four. By that time the leaden sky was -growing dark, and they looked around for the best shelter obtainable. At -last they chose a spot where there were some rocks and thickly set -trees. - -“This isn’t as good as it might be, but it’s the best around here, I -reckon,” said Lawson. - -They scraped away the snow and built a fire, and then heaped up some -brushwood as a shelter from the wind. But it kept growing colder and -colder, until they were glad enough to huddle close to the blaze with -their coats buttoned closely around them. - -“This is going to be a banner night,” said Henry, and his words proved -correct, so far as the cold was concerned. The temperature dropped -steadily until two o’clock in the morning, when Dave felt as if he was -“breathing icicles” as he expressed it. It was so cold that nobody could -sleep, and they spent the time in hugging the fire and in drinking hot -coffee. The two men had a bottle of liquor, of which they consumed not a -little. The liquor was offered to the two youths, but each declined. - -“I think we are better off without it,” said Dave, and Henry said the -same. - - - - - CHAPTER XXI - A NEW MOVE - - -All were glad to see the sun rise in the morning. The storm had cleared -away, the wind had fallen, and gradually the temperature rose once more. - -“That was a night to remember,” said Henry. “I don’t want to be out in -anything colder.” - -“Nor I,” answered his cousin. “Had it not been for the roaring fire and -the hot coffee we might have been frozen to death.” - -“I’d rather have my liquor than the coffee,” said Devine. - -“I don’t agree with you,” said Dave. “Liquor may heat you up for awhile, -but it will make you colder afterwards.” - -They were glad enough to break camp and walk just for the sake of -getting warm. But they were all more or less sleepy, and in the middle -of the day each dozed off after dinner. That night they found a -well-sheltered spot, and got a rest that did them a world of good. The -weather was still cold, but not as freezing as it had been. - -It was not until two days later that they reached the first of the -settlements, and after that they slept each night in either a log cabin -or some other shelter. The folks they met were glad to do what they -could for them, although this was but little, as the Indian war had left -them all comparatively poor. - -“I’ve got to start just where I began twelve years ago,” said one old -settler. “The Injuns didn’t leave me a thing but this old cow-shed. -We’ve got to build a new cabin, and buy some stock, and do a mountain o’ -work to get the place into shape again.” And his position was that of -hundreds of others. Many had left the frontier entirely, not caring to -make a living where there was so much danger. - -Another slight snowstorm was encountered, but the party kept on -steadily, and soon came within sight of Will’s Creek. Then, one clear -afternoon, both Dave and Henry set up a loud shout: - -“Rodney!” - -“Hello!” was the answer, and Rodney, who was out hunting, turned to them -in great amazement. “Dave and Henry! How in the world did you get here?” - -“Walked,” answered Henry. “How are all the folks at home?” - -“Everybody is doing very well. But this is certainly a surprise. Come -along to the house. The folks will be wild to see you, mother -especially,” and Rodney gave Henry a meaning glance. - -They soon reached the log cabin, and all at the place rushed out to give -them a warm greeting. Mrs. Morris kissed her son several times and then -kissed Dave, and little Nell also came in for her share of caresses. - -“I certainly did not expect you at this season,” said Joseph Morris. -“Perhaps you have brought some sort of a message?” and he looked -inquiringly at his son and his nephew. - -“It’s about father,” said Dave. He tried to go on, but his voice choked -up and he motioned for Henry to speak. - -Henry told the tale of the disaster at the trading post, just as it had -been related by Peaceful Jones. Mr. Morris and the others listened with -keen interest. Mrs. Morris burst into tears and Nell did likewise. - -“Dave, I am so sorry for you!” cried his aunt, as she hugged the youth -to her breast. - -“And so am I!” burst out Nell. “Oh, that wicked, wicked Jean Bevoir!” - -“I do not wonder that you wished to bring the news home,” said Joseph -Morris. “It is a fearful state of affairs. The fight must have been a -losing one from the start. Peaceful Jones can be thankful that he -escaped.” - -“I wanted to go to the trading post—to get somebody from the fort to -go,” said Dave, brokenly. “But no one in command would take the -responsibility.” - -“It is because of the rumors that are afloat,” answered his uncle. “Some -say Pontiac is going to do his best to capture Fort Pitt and every place -west of Fort Detroit.” - -The whole evening was spent in discussing the situation, Dave and Henry -going over matters just as they had at the fort. It was a sober -home-coming, and none of the older folks thought of going to bed until -late. Lawson and Devine were told to make themselves at home. - -“Sam Barringford has gone to Fort Cumberland on business,” said Joseph -Morris, in reply to an inquiry from Henry. “He will be back to-morrow or -the day after.” - -The next day matters were talked over once more, and Dave told his uncle -that nothing would satisfy him but to make the effort to reach the -trading post and learn the truth concerning his parent. - -“Well, I do not blame you, Dave,” answered his uncle. “But to get out -there from here will be no easy matter, and to go alone or with only a -handful of men would be folly. By this time Jean Bevoir has probably put -the post in a good state of defense, and, since Jones escaped, he must -be on constant guard.” - -“I have a little plan to suggest, Uncle Joe. Why cannot we travel almost -to the post and then go into quarters somewhere and send one or two men -out in quiet? The men might go to the post, pretend to be friendly with -Bevoir, and state that Peaceful Jones is dead, having been found so in -the woods. Bevoir may then expose his plans and relax his vigilance, and -we can watch our chances, rush in, and take possession.” - -This plan appealed strongly to Henry, and even Mr. Morris nodded as if -he approved. Still, there were many things to consider, the planter told -his nephew, and he wanted a few days to deliberate. That night he talked -it over in private with his wife. - -“Dave wants to find out the truth about his father, Lucy,” said the -planter. “I do not blame him, and I want to find out the truth myself, -and see that justice is done. If he goes out to the trading post I feel -it will be my duty to go with him.” - -“But, Joseph, I do not wish to stay here alone!” cried Mrs. Morris. -“Remember, I have not only Nell but the twins to take care of!” - -“Henry will want to go with Dave, since they are like brothers,” -continued Joseph Morris. “But Rodney can remain here, and so can some of -the neighbors, if you wish it.” - -“And would you go out there alone with the boys?” - -“No! no! by no means! I should want to organize a regular expedition, -and have the men sworn into regular army service at the fort. Then, when -the time came, we could deal with Bevoir and his men in true military -style.” - -“You must have been doing a deal of thinking about this, Joseph?” - -“And why not? James was my only living brother, and he was very dear to -me.” - -“And he was dear to me too, and I think of Dave as of a son. But I hate -to see you leave, just when we thought we might settle down again as of -old.” - -“Poor Dave will never have any peace of mind until he knows the exact -truth.” - -“True! My heart aches for him. Well, Joseph, do as you think best. But, -for my sake, do not be rash!” And then Mrs. Morris kissed her husband -affectionately. - -The next day Sam Barringford came back from Fort Cumberland. He too was -surprised to see the new arrivals and greatly shocked over the news they -had brought. - -“The skunk! The dirty skunk!” cried the frontiersman, referring to Jean -Bevoir. “Oh, just wait till I git my paws on him, thet’s all!” And his -big frame shook with emotion. He was willing to start for the post at -any time and under any conditions. - -Barringford had brought in news that interested the Morrises as much, -almost, as it did himself. At Fort Cumberland he had met a -French-Englishman, who had just arrived from Detroit. This gentleman -knew something about Maurice Hamilton, the father of the twins, and said -that Mr. Hamilton was not in England but in this country, although -exactly where he could not tell. He had started for London by way of New -York, but had then changed his mind and gone to Philadelphia. - -“As soon as I heard thet, I sent a letter to Philadelphia,” said Sam -Barringford. “If he’s thar he’ll most likely git it and write back, or -come on.” - -“I hope he does come on,” said Mrs. Morris. “I should like to see what -the father of Tom and Artie looks like.” - -“I don’t want Tom and Artie to go away,” pouted Nell. “I love them and I -want them to stay here.” - -“Well, they are not going away just yet,” said Rodney, to quiet his -sister. - -During the winter a great many trappers and frontiersmen remained close -to the forts and settlements, so it was comparatively easy for Joseph -Morris and Dave to organize the expedition that was to start for the -trading post on the Ohio. The company was organized upon military lines, -with Joseph Morris as captain, and Dave and Henry as first and second -lieutenants. It was composed of eighteen men, all well versed in -shooting and in scouting. As an old army sharpshooter, Sam Barringford -was placed in charge of the advance guard. The company took along a -pack-train of twelve horses, each animal carrying only such articles as -were deemed necessary for the trip. The men were told why the expedition -had been formed, and each promised to stand by Mr. Morris to the end. - -While the preparations were being made, the holidays came and went, but -only Nell and the twins received any gifts, the minds of the older folks -being filled with other matters. - -“I couldn’t celebrate Christmas if I tried,” said Dave to Henry. “In -fact, I couldn’t celebrate anything. All I want to do is to find out the -truth about father.” - -“And bring Jean Bevoir, Benoit Vascal, and those rascally Indians to -justice,” added Henry, who always looked at the practical side of -affairs. - -It had been arranged that Asa Dobson and his wife should remain at the -Morris homestead for the time being, and also an old colored man known -as Pompey Sugg. Pompey was a fine shot, and said he would keep a -constant guard against Indians. - -“Dar ain’t no Injuns gwine ter git de best ob dis chicken,” said the -colored man. “If da come nosin’ around hyer Pomp will gib ’em a dose ob -buckshot, ki hi!” And he laughed as if shooting Indians was the best -joke in the world. He was known to be a faithful fellow, and Joseph -Morris placed great reliance on him. - -The expedition was gotten together at Fort Cumberland, but the actual -start was from the Morris homestead. Here, many men and women gathered -to see the party off, and numerous were the handshakes and well-wishes. -Dave received a warm embrace from his aunt. - -“Keep up your courage,” she whispered into his ear. “Remember, Dave, I -shall always be a mother to you, and your Uncle Joseph will be a -father.” - -“Yes, I know, Aunt Lucy, and you are very kind,” he answered. He would -have said more, but the words stuck in his throat. - -“Take good care o’ the twins!” called out Sam Barringford. And then he -gave each a tight hug, for he did not know but that their father would -be along to take them away before his return. - -“Good-bye, Lucy,” said Joseph Morris, to his wife, as he gave her a last -embrace. “Remember, I shall be back again as soon as possible. Do not -worry while I am away.” - -“How can I help but worry?” she answered, through her tears. “The West -is such a wild country, and the Indians and those wicked Frenchmen are -so cruel! If you give them the chance, they will kill you, and all of -the others, too, just as they did brother James and his party!” - -“We shall try to be careful.” - -Everything was now in readiness for the start, and at the command from -Joseph Morris the men fell into place and set off, the pack-horses with -their drivers occupying the middle of the little train. The boundless -West and the mighty forest lay before them. Would they succeed or fail -in their mission? - - - - - CHAPTER XXII - A FIGHT AMONG WILD BEASTS - - -“There is no use in talking, this is certainly slow traveling. If it -wasn’t for the pack-horses we could get along twice as fast.” - -It was Henry who spoke, and he addressed his father. The pair were -trudging along the snow-clad trail, with Dave and Sam Barringford -slightly in advance. It was a mild, clear day in January, with the sun -kissing every mound of white and causing it to glitter as if with -diamonds. - -The little expedition had been on the march four days, and all evidence -of civilization had been left behind. They were taking what Sam -Barringford and two of the other frontiersmen considered a “short cut” -on the route to Fort Pitt. Whether or not they would stop at the fort -when they arrived in that vicinity was still an open question. On the -one hand, they did not wish to lose the time to do so, and on the other, -they wanted to make certain that no news from the West had come to the -stronghold during their absence. - -So far they had seen no trace of the Indians—indeed, they had met no -strangers of any kind. The loneliness of the wilderness winter was on -all sides of them. Sometimes they journeyed for hours through the -untracked snow without a single sound disturbing them. At times this -oppressiveness was hard on Dave and caused him to grow so “blue” that he -hardly knew what to do. Henry tried to cheer him up, but with little -success. - -The frontiersmen were all of the silent kind—their calling had rendered -them so—and conversation dragged, enlivened only now and then by the -talk of the men who urged along the horses. The steeds did their best, -but the footing was uncertain, and more than once they went down into -pitfalls partly covered with snow and had to be hauled out by main -strength. - -“The Injuns have certainly left this neighborhood,” observed Sam -Barringford, after another spell of silence. “Not a sign on ’em -anywhere.” - -“I am glad of that,” answered Joseph Morris. “I want to meet nobody -until we arrive at Fort Pitt or the trading post.” - -“When I war to Fort Cumberland I heard a report about Pontiac,” went on -the old frontiersman. “They said he war goin’ west—to stir up the -redskins along the Mississippi and lower Ohio, to make another attack on -the English. It war said the French trappers an’ traders would help -him.” - -“Such a thing is possible,” answered Joseph Morris. “Of one thing I am -certain: Pontiac will not rest until he has either won a victory or been -killed.” - -It was true that Pontiac was again active, this time close to the banks -of the Illinois River. Here he essayed to unite the western tribes -against the English,—a work that availed him little. - -The Indian uprisings at Fort Pitt, Detroit, and other points had created -a terrible feeling against the red men in all portions of the Colonies, -but this hatred was most bitter in Pennsylvania, especially in Paxton -township, where a large body of settlers of Irish and Scotch blood -organized themselves into a command popularly known as the Paxton Boys. -This command hunted down the Indians on all sides, and even slaughtered -a harmless tribe, living under the protection of some Moravian -missionaries. - -“Down with all redskins!” was their cry, and they moved upon Lancaster, -where some Indians had taken refuge in the workhouse. The doors were -battered down and all of the Indians slain, and then the Paxton Boys -marched down to Philadelphia, to capture some of the enemy who had fled -to that city. To hold the maddened frontiersmen in check, Benjamin -Franklin aided in forming a body of militia, and these compelled the -Paxton Boys to leave without further bloodshed. The killing of the -friendly Indians was looked upon by the law-abiding citizens as an -outrage and the feeling against the Paxton Boys was very bitter. On -their side, the Paxton Boys contended that the Indians had all proved -treacherous more or less and that “the only good Indian was the dead -Indian,”—a saying that soon became a household word among a certain -class of the communities. - -In many cases, after the meeting at Johnson Hall, the Indians were -compelled to give up their captives, and this brought on numerous -affecting scenes. Some women and children had been separated from their -people for several years, and had made warm ties among the Indians. A -number had even married red men and had children, and these did not want -to separate from their husbands. Some little children had completely -forgotten their real parents, and when taken from the Indians cried -loudly, much to the distress of their mothers and fathers. - -“Look! look!” cried one poor woman. “My own child, my Bessie, does not -know me!” - -“And look you!” said one man. “My Johanna has married an Indian and they -have two children! I would rather she were dead!” And the settler turned -and would have nothing more to do with his own flesh and blood. -Tradition says of this man that in years after the Indian husband of his -daughter saved him from being massacred during an uprising, and he was -taken to safety by a grandson whom he had disowned. - -One day after another went by, and still the expedition under Joseph -Morris wended its way westward through the wilderness. So far the -weather had remained fine, but at the end of a week it began to thaw and -then there set in a misty rain, disagreeable in the extreme. The trail -was sloppy, and if a person slipped down he was bound to get wet through -and through. - -“This is fine weather in which to catch cold,” grumbled Henry. The only -thing he objected to when being out was rain. - -During the rain and mist, which lasted for two whole days, they made but -slow progress. Each night they went into camp early, and spent several -hours in getting dry and making themselves half comfortable. - -On the morning of the day when it cleared off, Henry and Dave were in -advance, in company with Sam Barringford. They were looking for game, -and hoped to stir up some rabbits, if not something larger. - -“I see some partridges!” cried Henry, presently, and was about to take -aim, when a sudden loud snapping and snarling broke upon the air, coming -from the forest on their left. - -“Wild animals!” cried Dave. “Don’t you think so, Sam?” - -“I do,” was the short answer. “Come on an’ see wot they be.” - -The old frontiersman led the way, and soon the party of three came upon -a scene that thrilled them with interest. - -In a little glade in the forest lay a dead deer, the blood still pouring -from a big bite in the throat. Close at hand were a small panther and a -full-grown wildcat, tightly locked together, and biting and snapping in -the most vicious manner possible. At one moment the wildcat would be on -top, then the panther, and then they would roll over and over, the snow -and fur flying in all directions. The blood was flowing from a gash in -the panther’s side and the wildcat’s left ear was slitted into shreds. - -“Here is a fight surely!” whispered Barringford. “They mean business, -they do!” - -“What shall we do?” whispered Dave. The sight thrilled him to the core. - -“Let ’em have it out, lad—ain’t no ust to interfere in sech a muss as -thet.” - -The two animals were certainly “having it out.” Over and over they went -and the fur continued to fly. The wildcat now had the panther by the -neck, while the latter was twisted half around and was clawing -frantically, trying to reach its enemy’s vitals. - -“Looks as if the wildcat would get the best of it,” observed Henry. But -at that moment the larger beast shook the hold of the other, and -swinging around caught the wildcat in the stomach with its claws. Then -the wildcat closed in with another snarl, catching the panther in the -lower jaw. It was a death-like grip that could not be shaken, and the -animals fell over on their sides. The fur and snow continued to fly, but -both animals soon grew weaker. There was a last struggle, a gasp from -the wildcat, and then that animal stretched out dead. The hold on the -panther’s jaw relaxed and slowly the panther staggered up. It went but a -few steps, then fell down, gave a grunt or two, and began to kick -feebly. - -“Both on ’em done fer!” said Sam Barringford. “It war certainly a great -fight.” - -“The painter ain’t dead yet!” cried Henry. “Look out!” - -They turned and saw that the panther was trying to get up. It had -discovered the intruders and wanted to fight. It gave a feeble leap, but -failed to reach them. - -“I’ll fix thet painter,” murmured Barringford, and drew his hunting -knife. - -“Don’t touch him—let him go,” pleaded Dave. “He made such a good fight -against the wildcat.” The panther had turned towards the bushes. Now it -slunk out of sight, so weak that it could scarcely drag one foot after -another. Before they left the spot they saw the animal breathe its last. - -They examined the deer and found it had suffered nothing but the gaping -wound in the throat, made evidently by the wildcat. - -“This is a prize,” said Henry. “It saves us the trouble of shooting -one.” - -“I suppose the wildcat brought the deer down and the painter wanted to -steal it,” said Dave. “It’s a pretty good-sized deer for a wildcat to -tackle.” - -“I reckon as how the wildcat war half starved an’ got desprit,” spoke up -the old frontiersman. “He must have jumped down on the deer from some -tree and hung on till the deer war dead.” - -The others had by this time come up, and they looked at the deer with -interest. The game was slung over the back of one of the horses and the -onward march resumed. That night all enjoyed the fresh venison. - -On the following day they came to a fair-sized river, and there encamped -for their noonday repast. Taking an axe, Henry cut a round hole in the -ice and brought forth his fishing lines. - -“Going to try fishing, eh?” said Dave. “All right, I’ll do what I can to -help.” - -They soon had their lines ready, and baiting up, allowed them to sink -through the hole. The fish were sluggish, and for a long time they got -no bite. But then came a lazy tug, and hauling in, Henry brought up a -fat fish that weighed all of two pounds. - -“Good for you, Henry!” cried his cousin. “You always were lucky at this -sort of thing.” - -“Not always,” answered Henry, grimly. “I have fished through the ice -more than once and caught next to nothing.” - -“I’ll never forget how I once brought up a snake and then fell into the -water,” went on Dave, recalling an incident already related in detail in -this series. “No more snakes for me. I hate——Gracious! Look at that! A -snake as sure as you’re born!” - -Dave’s line and hook came up. On the end was something dark and slimy. -Henry started back and then gave a laugh. - -“Only an old tree-root, Dave!” he cried, merrily. “Don’t holler before -you are hurt.” - -“I was thinking of that other snake,” answered his cousin, somewhat -sheepishly. He dropped in his hook again. “Hope I get a bite this time.” - -His wish was gratified. Fishing proved so good that the youths persuaded -Mr. Morris to let them continue for awhile, and in less than an hour -they had a full mess for supper. The men enjoyed the change greatly, and -told Henry and Dave they could go fishing at every river the expedition -crossed. - - - - - CHAPTER XXIII - THE RESCUE OF THE STRANGER - - -A few days later brought the expedition to Fort Pitt. Captain Ecuyer was -surprised to see Dave and Henry back so soon, and praised them for the -rapid time they had made. But he shook his head when he listened to the -further plans of the party. - -“I believe you are taking a great risk,” said he. “I have been sending -out scouts within the last week, and their reports are far from -satisfactory. They have seen Indians at a distance, and there is not the -slightest doubt but that this stronghold is being watched closely.” - -“It is queer then that we were not attacked in coming here,” answered -Joseph Morris. “We kept a careful watch, but saw no enemy.” - -“Perhaps your guard saved you,” said the commandant of the fort. “But, -remember, it will be different when you go westward from here. The -Indians are surely gathering in the West, and what they intend to do, -Heaven alone knows. Were I you I should at least wait until spring -before venturing further.” - -Dave would not listen to this, and Henry sided with his impatient -cousin, knowing well how anxious Dave was to learn the truth concerning -his father. Joseph Morris realized the situation, and it must be -admitted that he, too, was anxious, since his brother had been very dear -to him. A consultation was held, and it was resolved that the expedition -should rest at Fort Pitt until over Sunday—four days—and then push -forward as before. - -The coming of the expedition to Fort Pitt brought a smile to the face of -Peaceful Jones, who was slowly recovering from the privation to which he -had been exposed. - -“It’s an outright shame I can’t go with ye!” said the old trapper, with -a profound sigh. “Wouldn’t like no better fun nor to lick Jean Bevoir -an’ his crowd good!” - -“Don’t worry about thet, Peaceful,” answered Sam Barringford. “Only give -us the chance an’ we’ll lick Bevoir an’ his crowd good an’ proper, -believe me!” - -“Thet feller ain’t fit to be on this airth, Sam—he’s wuss nor a snake in -the grass!” - -“I agree with ye, Peaceful, an’ when I git through with him he’ll be -wuss off nor any snake ye ever heard tell on,” concluded the old -frontiersman. - -From Fort Pitt the expedition took to the trail James Morris had -followed in journeying to his trading post. The January thaw was a thing -of the past, and once again cold weather, with several heavy falls of -snow, reigned supreme. The trail was in spots all but impassable, and on -more than one occasion they had to literally dig the horses out of the -drifts into which they wandered. Twice they had to go into camp for two -days at a time—to rest up and wait for the skies to clear. It was a -wearisome and courage-testing journey, as even stout-limbed Sam -Barringford testified. - -“It’s pure grit an’ nuthin else is goin’ to carry us through,” said he. -“Fer this travelin’ ain’t fit fer a dog.” - -“There is one comfort,—it is keeping the Indians away from us,” answered -Joseph Morris. “They won’t venture very far from their villages in this -sort of weather.” - -But Joseph Morris was mistaken. All unknown to the whites, the red men -were watching their movements closely. Even though the expedition had -left Fort Pitt under cover of darkness the Indians had discovered them -on the western trail early in the morning, and now speedy runners were -carrying the news to various villages for fifty miles around. - -Soon a counter expedition, under Eagle Nose,—a well-known Maumee River -warrior,—was sent out, to do battle with the coming white men. The -Indians in this detachment numbered about thirty warriors, all young and -eager to fight. They advanced over the snow on snowshoes, and as soon as -they came up to the trail of Joseph Morris’s expedition went into -hiding. - -“Let us wait until the hated English sleep,” said Eagle Nose. “Then we -can kill them all and take their goods and horses back to our lodges -with us.” It may be mentioned here that it was Eagle Nose and his men -who had, the year before, fallen on an English detachment near Venango -and murdered all the soldiers, mutilating some of the bodies most -horribly. For this Eagle Nose became afterwards known as the Red -Butcher,—an appellation that clung to him to the day of his death. - -On the afternoon that the Indians came upon the trail of the whites, Sam -Barringford set out on a hunt, taking Dave and Henry with him. A halt -had been made, to rest up before climbing through a hollow all but -filled with snow. The old frontiersman and the two youths took -themselves into the woods where the snow was not so deep, and there -presently came upon the tracks of some big animal which Barringford -declared must be an elk. - -“Let us get him by all means!” cried Henry, enthusiastically. - -The others were willing enough, and followed the tracks of the elk a -distance of quarter of a mile. Here they came to something of a buffalo -trail, and were surprised to behold the prints of many feet and of -snowshoes. - -“Sam, what does this mean?” demanded Dave, quickly. - -The old frontiersmen did not answer at once, but examined the prints -with care. Then he brought his teeth together with a snap—a sure sign -that he had made an important discovery. - -“Injuns!” he said, laconically. “Injuns!” - -“Indians!” - -“Aye, lad—twenty or more on ’em, too,—an’ headed up along close to the -trail we made this morning.” - -“They must be following us,” broke in Henry. - -“It looks like it.” - -“Do you think they mean to attack us, Sam?” questioned Dave. - -“They will ef they git the chanct, Dave. It ain’t in human nature fer -’em not to—thet is, if they be enemies.” - -“They might be friends.” - -“Wall, I wouldn’t gamble on thet, out here.” - -“What had we best do?” - -“You an’ Henry can go back and tell Mr. Morris about it. I’ll go on an’ -do a little scout work.” - -So it was decided, and in a very few minutes Dave and Henry were on -their way to the spot where the expedition had encamped. Sam Barringford -followed the trail of the Indians, moving along with the secrecy that -years of experience had given him. - -“We must lose no time in getting back to camp,” said Henry, as he and -his cousin hurried along. “Every moment may be precious.” - -“Right you are, Henry. Oh, I hope we escape!” - -“Captain Ecuyer must have been right—we have been watched.” - -Their hurried entrance into camp created some consternation, and the -story they had to tell made every one uneasy. A council of war was held, -and the camp was moved to another spot, where the frontiersmen might -make a better stand, in case of an attack. - -Two anxious hours went by, and all looked for the return of Sam -Barringford, but he did not come. Then it began to grow dark, and guards -were posted all around the camp, to give the alarm at the first -appearance of any Indians. - -Dave was on guard duty, close to some rocks which the wind had swept -clear of snow, when he saw a figure stealing across an open glade a -short distance away. Hardly had the figure appeared when two Indians -came into view, each with a bow and arrows. Both red men aimed at the -other figure and sent an arrow on its way. The figure threw up its arms -and pitched headlong in the snow, beside a clump of bushes. - -“It must be Sam Barringford!” cried the youth, to himself. “Sam—and he -has been shot!” - -It was an awful thought, and for the moment Dave did not know what to -do. Then, as the Indians came closer, he took aim at one with his rifle -and blazed away. The Indian staggered and fell, and then dragged himself -back from the direction he had come, seriously wounded. The second -Indian ran away and was quickly lost to view in the tall timber. - -Dave was busy reloading, when his uncle rushed up, followed by two -frontiersmen, all with their rifles in readiness to resist an attack. - -“What was it, Dave?” questioned his uncle. And when told, he added: “Was -it Sam?” - -“I think so. He dropped——There he is now!” - -As the youth uttered the words the man who had fallen picked himself up -in a dazed way. He walked a few paces in one direction and then turned -and walked in another. Clearly he did not know what he was doing. - -“He has been struck and is hurt,” said Joseph Morris. “Hello, come this -way!” he called out. “Come this way!” - -The man at first paid no attention, but presently he came towards them, -reeling and staggering from weakness. One arrow was sticking through his -arm, and the second had grazed the back of his head. - -“Save me!” he moaned. “Don’t let the—them ki—kill me!” - -“We’ll do what we can for you,” answered Joseph Morris, and ran to take -the man by the arm. He was an utter stranger, tall and slim, with curly -black hair and dark eyes. His clothing had once been of the best, but -was now much soiled and in rags. - -“The Indians—they are all coming!” gasped the man, when he felt able to -speak once more. “They have plotted to fall upon a pack-train bound for -th—the we—west. I was their prisoner and thought to—to get to the -pack-train and warn them of——” He tried to go on, but could not, and -sank a leaden weight in Joseph Morris’s arms. - -“Poor fellow, he is almost done for,” said one of the frontiersmen. “I -don’t think he will live.” - -“Let us carry him into camp,” answered Joseph Morris. “He may not be so -badly hurt as you think.” - -The two frontiersmen who had come up with Mr. Morris picked the -senseless form up and hurried to the camp with it, where they did what -they could for the sufferer. In the meantime Joseph Morris did a little -scouting around, but could see nothing more of the Indians. - -“The alarm has frightened them off for the time being,” said Mr. Morris. -“They may be too cowardly to attack us while we are wide-awake and on -the watch.” - -Fortunately for the whites, the night proved to be an exceptionally -clear one, with the stars glittering in the heavens like so many -diamonds. It was quiet, saving for the far-away howls of some wolves and -the occasional bark of a fox or hoot of an owl. But the frontiersmen -kept on guard, not knowing what each succeeding minute might bring -forth. - -The man who had been brought in still lay unconscious and breathing -heavily. He was a handsome individual, all of forty years of age, and -evidently of good breeding. His face was pale, as if he had suffered -much during his captivity among the Indians. - -“I wish he was well enough to tell his tale,” said Henry. “He might -relate something to our advantage.” - -As the hours slipped by all the Morrises became anxious over the -prolonged absence of Sam Barringford. At the most they had not expected -the old frontiersman to remain away later than midnight. - -“Perhaps something has happened to him,” said Henry. “Those Indians are -mighty slick.” - -“Oh, don’t say that!” cried Dave. “Sam knew exactly what he was doing, -and he ought to be able to take care of himself.” - -“He may have walked into some trap. You must remember, Dave, that some -of the redskins out here are slyer than those in the East. They are -regular foxes on the warpath.” - -Slowly the night wore away, until a glow in the east announced the -coming of another day. The man who had been brought in was now -conscious, but so weak he could scarcely speak. He wanted to tell them -something, but could not, and sank back again utterly exhausted. - -“Take it easy,” said Joseph Morris, kindly. “We will do what we can for -you.” And at this, the man tried to smile, but it was a dismal failure. - -“Tell me one thing,” said Dave, who had come up a moment before. “Did -you meet another white man in the woods—a frontiersman, one of our men?” - -At this the man shook his head. “Nobody—on—only Indians!” he gasped. - -“Then something has certainly happened to Sam,” said Dave, and gave a -sigh that came from the very bottom of his young heart. - - - - - CHAPTER XXIV - SNOWBOUND ON THE TRAIL - - -Another council of war was held, and two of the frontiersmen went -scouting around once more. Not a sign was to be seen of the Indians, and -at last Joseph Morris concluded to advance as before, but with everybody -on the alert. - -“If Sam comes back to this point he will know that we have gone on and -can follow us up,” said the planter. - -The sick man had to be carried on a stretcher, and the men took turns at -the task. As soon as breakfast was had, the expedition moved, three -frontiersmen well to the front, on the watch for the first sign of the -enemy. - -Thus a mile had been covered, and they were approaching a spot where -their route lay between a cliff and a hill, when an interruption came -from the rear. The expedition halted, and a minute later Sam Barringford -came up on a run, and well-nigh exhausted. - -“I war afraid ye’d move afore I got back,” panted the old frontiersman. -“Ye hadn’t ought to have done it. You be a-walkin’ right into a hornets’ -nest.” - -“Where have you been?” questioned Dave. - -“Been follerin’ them Injuns. They are a bad crowd under Eagle Nose, an’ -they mean to wipe us out, if they kin do it. They held a grand pow-wow -last night, and they have moved forward to the cliff and the hill thet’s -ahead. When we go through below they reckoned to shoot us down with -bullets an’ arrows, an’ roll some big rocks down on us. I waited to -learn jest what they war up to an’ thet kept me from gittin’ back to -camp afore.” - -Sam Barringford, after that, related his night’s adventures in detail. -At no time had the Indians seen him or suspected his presence, and he -had been so close that he had even stolen a gun belonging to one of -them, a weapon of ancient French make, which he now had with him. - -Having no desire to run into the “hornets’ nest” which the old -frontiersman had described, Joseph Morris determined to move onward by -another route. This suited Barringford, but he was of a mind to attack -the Indians because of the plot they had concocted. - -“We must teach ’em a lesson,” he said. “If we don’t, it won’t be safe -travelin’ for us at any time.” - -This was considered sound advice by many present, and in the end it was -decided that six men should climb the hill ahead, coming out above the -Indians if possible. The rest of the expedition, in the meantime, was to -move onward around the cliff, making a wide detour, to avoid all -possible contact with the enemy. - -“I want to go with Sam,” said Henry to his father, and was at last -permitted to accompany the old frontiersman. Dave had to remain with the -others, to help take care of the horses and the sick man. - -Sam Barringford knew exactly where he was going, having traveled the -ground several times in the past. He was a natural-born woodsman, and -never forgot a locality once he had visited it. To him trees and rocks -were the same as signboards to a dweller in the city. The only time he -got lost was when a territory was entirely new to him. - -The way was by no means an easy one and, when the top of the hill was -reached, the tramp through the snow had taken the wind out of more than -one of the detachment. The men and Henry rested for a few minutes, and -then, cautioned by Barringford, moved slowly and cautiously over the -hilltop in the direction of the trail far below. - -“Halt!” whispered Sam Barringford, presently. “I see an Injun!” And he -pointed out the red warrior two hundred feet or more below them. - -The Indian was watching the trail below, and soon he was joined by ten -or a dozen others. The Indians were totally unconscious of the fact that -some white men were looking down upon them, and their eyes were fixed -steadfastly upon the trail below, watching for the first appearance of -the Morris expedition. - -“What a trap!” murmured Henry. “Had we been caught in it, nothing could -have saved us.” - -“Right you are, Henry,” said another of the party. “Sam deserves a good -deal of credit for saving us.” - -To give the others of the expedition time to get as far as possible from -the scene of action, it was decided to wait awhile before beginning an -attack on the Indians. The latter waited patiently for over an hour, -when they began to show some uneasiness, thinking their plot had -miscarried. - -“Now we’ll show ’em a trick or two,” said Sam Barringford, and gave the -order to advance. - -The Indians were taken completely by surprise, and at the first fire of -the English three fell, one dead and the others mortally wounded. One -other was struck in the thigh and rolled down the hill on to the trail -below. - -“Give it to ’em again!” roared Sam Barringford. “Give it to ’em, the -sons o’ Satan!” And he fired a second time, while some of the others did -the same. Another Indian went down, and then the rest fled, in several -directions. The whites went after them, and in the end fully half of the -band under Eagle Nose were exterminated. Eagle Nose himself was struck -in the left forearm, and withdrew with the rest of his warriors, vowing -bitter vengeance. - -Of the whites, strange to state, not one was injured, although the red -men fired arrows and shots at them many times. One arrow went through -the hunting shirt of one of the frontiersmen, and a bullet clipped the -cap of another, and that was all. The Indians fled to the northward, and -that was the last seen of them for a long while to come. Some were very -bitter against Eagle Nose for leading them into a trap, as they -expressed it, and there was some talk of deposing the chief, but nothing -came of this. - -“Sam, you saved us from utter annihilation,” said Joseph Morris, when -the two parts of the expedition had been once more united. “I thank you -from the bottom of my heart,” and he gave the old frontiersman’s hand a -tight squeeze. - -“I wish I had been in that fight,” said Dave to Henry. “It must have -been exciting.” - -“It was, but not as much so as some of the fights we had during the -war,” answered his cousin. “We had the Indians on the run from the very -start.” - -No time was now lost in moving forward, it being Joseph Morris’s wish to -leave the Indians as far behind as possible. They traveled until late at -night, when they reached a safe shelter among the rocks and trees. It -was now cloudy once more, and soon after they went into camp it began to -snow. - -“We are in for a heavy fall,” said Dave, and he was right. The snow -continued all night and all of the next day, and still there was no -let-up to the storm. They remained in the temporary camp, watching the -fall anxiously. - -“Dave, I really believe we are going to be snowed in!” cried Henry, as -he walked outside, to get a good look at the sky. “It doesn’t seem to -brighten up a bit!” - -“Just what I am thinking,” answered his cousin. “It is certainly coming -down as thickly as ever.” - -All were now watching the snowfall, and they went to bed with anxious -hearts. Dave woke up just at dawn. The snow had stopped, but there was -more overhead, as he could easily see. - -“If only this storm had kept off a few days longer,” sighed Joseph -Morris. Three days of fair traveling would have brought the expedition -to the vicinity of the trading post. - -Breakfast was had, and all were wondering if they could make any headway -in such a depth of snow when the flakes began to come down again. The -whole landscape was blotted out in a sea of whirling flakes. - -“That settles it; we remain here,” grumbled Dave. The nearer he drew to -the trading post the more anxious he became to learn the whole truth of -the situation there. - -The men of the expedition made themselves as comfortable as possible, -and not to be caught without provisions, some went out on a short hunt. -They managed to bring down a few birds, but that was all—not worth the -powder and shot, as Barringford declared. - -Dave was greatly interested in the sick man, who dozed away the greater -portion of the time. Once or twice the youth tried to engage the man in -conversation, but the effort was a failure. - -“I’ll have to wait till he feels more like himself,” said Dave to Henry. -“One thing is certain, he is not used to a life in the open or used to -roughing it in any way.” - -“It is queer how he came among the Indians, Dave. He will most likely -have quite a story to tell—if he is ever able to tell it.” - -“Oh, I think he will recover, don’t you?” - -“Yes, physically, but——” And Henry shrugged his shoulders. - -“You think it will affect him here?” And Dave tapped his forehead. - -“Perhaps. Don’t you remember Dick Barsbee? He went crazy from the Indian -tortures he endured.” - -“Yes, I remember that.” Dave shook his head. “I hope the man comes -around all right. I must say there is something about him that interests -me a great deal.” - -“Does his face look familiar to you?” - -“It certainly does,—but I can’t trace the likeness to save myself.” - -“It’s the same way with me, and Sam Barringford says the same. Now what -can it mean?” - -“We may find out when we learn who the man is.” - -The snow continued all of that day and far into the night. Then the wind -arose, sweeping great drifts of white across the landscape. The -expedition was under the shelter of a cliff and some trees, and was -snowed in beyond a doubt. - -“Snowbound!” cried Sam Barringford, grimly. “Here we be an’ here we are -likely to stay fer some time to come.” - -“We are certainly shut in pretty well,” returned Joseph Morris. “At the -best, we’ll have to dig our way out.” - -“The hosses could never git through on the trail,” put in one of the -frontiersmen. “It would be cruelty to try it. Why, the snow must be ten -an’ twelve feet deep in some o’ the hollows.” - -“And we’d lose our way,” said another. “Might as well stay where we are -and be comfortable until it clears a bit.” He was troubled with soreness -of the feet, and found traveling very hard. - -“We can’t stay here very long,” said Joseph Morris. “We have lost so -much time our provisions are running low.” - -The matter was discussed for an hour, and they decided to remain in the -camp and make themselves as comfortable as possible. The snow was banked -up for shelter, and pine boughs cut for couches, and a roaring fire was -kept going all the while. - -“It’s a pity we must stay here,” sighed Dave. “I think if we could reach -the post in such weather as this we would take Jean Bevoir and his crowd -completely by surprise.” - -“I think so myself,” replied Henry. “But we must be patient, and take -matters as they come.” - - - - - CHAPTER XXV - CRUSHING NEWS - - -The expedition had to remain in camp for the best part of a week, and -during that time provisions ran exceedingly low. To stock the larder -several of the men, and also Dave and Henry, went out in the near-by -woods and shot whatever came into sight. The two youths were fortunate -in bringing down several wild turkeys of good size and also uncovered a -sleeping bear that they killed with ease. This meat came in when the -stock of provisions was at its lowest, and proved highly acceptable. - -At last the trail seemed to be fit to use once more, and Joseph Morris -ordered the advance to be made. It was hard walking, either on foot or -on snowshoes, and many times the poor horses refused to go another step -and had to rest for an hour at a time. Six miles were all they could -cover the first day after starting, and the youths felt as tired as if -they had walked five times that distance. Moving the sick stranger was a -harder task than ever, but nobody thought of leaving him behind. - -The second day, however, brought an improvement. They gained a small -creek flowing into the Kinotah and followed this to the larger stream. -Walking on the ice was easier than in the snow. Occasionally one or -another would slip down, but nobody complained. - -“We are at the old post!” cried Dave, as the burnt district came into -view. They stopped for dinner on the spot, and then took their way down -the Kinotah to the Ohio. - -The weather was now moderating rapidly, so that during the middle of the -day the sun was positively warm. Much of the snow turned to slush and -water, freezing a little at night and thawing more than ever during the -day. The surface of the river became wet, and Joseph Morris cautioned -all against stepping on ice that might be rotten. - -“If this weather keeps on it won’t be long before there is a spring -freshet,” remarked Sam Barringford. “Queer how quickly things change in -nature.” - -“That big snowfall about wound up the winter,” answered Henry, and he -was right, as it afterwards proved. - -It was Joseph Morris’s plan to halt when about a mile from the trading -post and then go forward with Sam Barringford and one or two others and -reconnoiter the situation. As the expedition neared the post all kept on -the alert for the possible appearance of Bevoir or any of his crowd. - -“For all we know Moon Eye may not be in the post at all, but somewhere -on the outside, on guard,” said Dave, who accompanied his uncle and -Barringford when reconnoitering. - -Mr. Morris, Barringford, and Dave advanced with extreme caution. It was -another warm day, with the sun shining brightly and the snow melting -rapidly on all sides. They kept among the bushes and trees until they -came to a point where they could see a corner of the stockade plainly. - -“Do you see anybody around?” asked Dave. He was so agitated that he -could not speak. Oh, if only he knew the whole truth about his father! - -Sam Barringford shook his head and so did Joseph Morris. Not a soul -could be seen, and slowly the three made their way to a point opposite -the stockade gate. - -“The gate is shut,” announced Dave. “I suppose it is barred, too.” - -“More’n likely,” answered Sam Barringford. He was looking at the -loopholes with a critical eye. “They are on guard,” he announced, a -minute later. - -“How do you know that?” questioned Joseph Morris. - -“Saw a feller squinting through a loophole jest now. Thar’s another!” -went on the old frontiersman. - -“I see an Indian!” said Dave, and pointed along the stockade, where a -crack in the posts had given him a glimpse of some feathers. “They are -surely on the watch.” - -“Then they must have learned of our coming!” murmured the planter, and -was much discouraged. - -A thorough survey of the situation convinced them that the party at the -post was indeed on guard. The alarm had been given by a runner of Eagle -Nose’s tribe, who had brought the word for Moon Eye’s benefit, the -latter chief being related to him by marriage. Jean Bevoir had been -greatly surprised, but had at once issued orders both to the Frenchmen -and the Indians to keep a close guard. - -“Ve shall fight zem,” he said, boldly. “Fight zem to ze end! I vill show -zem zat za cannot stand against Jean Bevoir!” - -The Frenchman had procured a good stock of rifles and ammunition, and -everybody in the post was, consequently, well armed. More than this, the -palisade had been strengthened at various points, making the trading -post a veritable fortress. - -The runner had not told Bevoir or Moon Eye how many men there were with -Joseph Morris, but said there must be at least a dozen. In the post were -now assembled ten Frenchmen, several of whom had been soldiers in the -army during the war for the possession of Canada, and fourteen Indians -under Moon Eye. There were also three Indian women and five Indian -children—all that were left of the tribe since the downfall of Pontiac’s -conspiracy. - -What to do next was a problem hard for Joseph Morris to solve. The more -he surveyed the situation the more he became convinced that to attack -the post openly would prove highly disastrous. - -“They have the best of the situation,” said he to Dave and the others. -“They could pick us off through the loopholes at will. Perhaps I had -better parley with them.” - -“Ye can’t parley with Bevoir,” answered Sam Barringford, in disgust. - -“And why not?” - -“Because ye can’t believe a word the Frencher says. Thet man would -rather lie nor eat.” - -“But perhaps I can convince him that he cannot hold the post,” went on -the planter. - -“Well, ye kin do as ye please, Mr. Morris, but I don’t agree to it. Ye -don’t know the varmint as I do, an’ as Mr. James Morris did,—an’ as Dave -an’ Henry do. We have got to git the best o’ them, either in the open or -by trickery. He won’t listen to reason until he’s licked good an’ -proper.” - -“I think Sam is right,” said Dave, as his uncle looked at him. “Jean -Bevoir is not to be trusted—father and I found that out a number of -times, to our sorrow. He may promise all sorts of things,—but he won’t -keep his word unless it suits him to do so.” - -Nevertheless, rather than risk a fight at the beginning, Joseph Morris -resolved to have a talk with the French trader, and for that purpose -sent a frontiersman named Hope to the post. Hope carried a white -handkerchief tied to a stick, and was allowed to come to within a few -paces of the stockade gate, when he was halted. - -“I want to talk to Jean Bevoir,” said the frontiersman. - -“Vat you vant?” demanded the Frenchman, from within, and without showing -himself. - -“Is that you, Jean Bevoir?” - -“Yees.” - -“Joseph Morris is here with a large party, and he demands that you throw -the gate of this post open.” - -“Ha! Vat for, tell me zat? So he can come in and murder us, not so?” - -“If you will not open the gate and let him march in he will come in by -force.” - -“Let heem try it! Let heem try it!” cried Jean Bevoir, in a rage. “Zis -is my post—I vill defend my property. Now I vant you to go avay—an’ stay -avay!” he added, sharply. - -“Will you talk to Mr. Morris?” - -“Vy I do zat? Haf I not told you vat to do? Go avay!” - -“He has something of great importance to say to you. Perhaps he will -make terms,” continued Hope, wishing to bring the two men together, so -that he might not have too much responsibility on his own shoulders. - -Jean Bevoir demurred and was evidently seconded by some other Frenchmen -within the post, but at last he consented to talk to Joseph Morris, -provided the planter would come to the gate unattended. Secretly the -French trader was anxious to know just what the English had in mind to -do. - -Hope went back and delivered his message. At once Dave, Henry, and -Barringford set up another protest. - -“There is sure to be treachery, father!” cried Henry. “Why, they may -even shoot you down in cold blood. You do not know the temper of these -black-hearted rascals.” - -“I do not think they will dare to go as far as that,” answered Joseph -Morris. He was brave-hearted to the core. “If they do kill me attack -them and show no mercy,” he added. - -The conference between Jean Bevoir and the planter took place an hour -later. Joseph Morris, waving a white handkerchief, approached the front -of the trading post boldly. He saw himself covered by several rifle -barrels, but did not falter. As he came to a halt there was a slight -noise, as a short ladder was thrown into place, and then the head of -Jean Bevoir appeared over the stockade gate. - -“Hullo! Jean Bevoir has shown himself!” cried Dave, who was at a -distance. “I must say, I didn’t think he would do it.” - -“He wants us to believe that he is not afraid,” answered Henry. -“Probably he has been fortifying his courage with a few drinks of rum.” -And in this guess Henry hit the nail on the head. - -“Jean Bevoir,” began James Morris. “Do you realize that you have -committed a great wrong?” - -“I haf done no wrong,” returned the Frenchman, stubbornly. “This post -ees mine; I shall keep heem.” - -“You killed my brother.” - -“It ees not so,—I did not touch heem.” - -“But he is dead, is not that true?” demanded the planter, with a sudden -hope swaying in his heart. - -“Yees, he ees dead. But I did it not, no. An Indian shot heem down—who, -I know not. He vas badly wounded, an’ I, yes, I hees enemy, took care of -heem, _oui_, until he died. Zen I gif heem a good burial. Vat can I do -more? He not do so much for Jean Bevoir, no! no!” - -“You caused his death—the attack on him and his companions was your -work,—it is useless to deny it. And this post is not yours. Since my -brother is dead it belongs to his son, David Morris,—and he shall have -it, be the cost what it may. Jean Bevoir, you must surrender, or take -the consequences.” - -At this plain speech the Frenchman grew slightly pale. But he quickly -recovered. - -“Ha! Take care how you threaten Jean Bevoir!” he exclaimed. “Ve are vell -armed here an’ ve can shoot! Haf I not told you zat zis post ees mine? I -haf ze papers, wid ze signature of James Morris, _oui_! Ze law ees as -good for me as for you, an’ I snap my fingair at you!” Jean Bevoir -suited the action to the word. “Go avay, an’ nevair come here again!” - -“You have my brother’s signature? Impossible! It must be a forgery! He -would never deal in that way with such as you.” - -“Eet ees true, an’ I warn you avay. Come back again at your peril!” -answered Jean Bevoir, and then disappeared from view. - -This was a signal that the conference was at an end. Turning swiftly, -Joseph Morris walked back into the forest. Barringford and the others -expected a shot or two, but nothing of the kind came. - -“What did he say?” asked Henry, rushing up. - -“He will give in to nothing,” answered the planter, with a sigh. - -“And father—what of father?” questioned Dave. He could hardly utter the -words. - -James Morris stepped to his side and caught Dave by both arms. - -“It’s too bad, my boy,” he said, tenderly. - -“Then he is—is——” - -“Yes, lad—he was badly wounded, so Jean Bevoir says, and died some time -later.” - -Dave staggered and sank down on a fallen tree. Never had he felt so -miserable before. For days and weeks he had been hoping against hope—and -now it had all been in vain. His father was gone, and he was left alone -in the world. - - - - - CHAPTER XXVI - BY WAY OF THE TUNNEL - - -“There is one consolation: if we cannot get into the post they cannot -very well get out. If the worst comes to the worst maybe we can starve -them into submission,” - -Henry uttered the words after a long council of war between his father -and the other men of the expedition. All had withdrawn to the shelter of -the forest, and were keeping a close watch on the trading post. - -Dave took but little interest in what was said. He was thinking of the -loss of his father. It was a terrible blow, and he did not see how he -would ever get over it. - -“Your plan is all right, Henry, but it would take too long,” said Sam -Barringford. “More’n likely Bevoir an’ his crowd have a good stock o’ -rations on hand an’ kin hold out all winter. They have shelter while we -have none. I’ve got another plan, although it’s mighty risky. Don’t ye -remember thet tunnel from the yard out into this forest? If the rascals -ain’t discovered thet we might use it in the dark an’ git into the post -thet way.” - -“Yes! yes!” cried Henry, brightening. “The tunnel Tony Jadwin and I -used. It came out in a hollow tree only a short distance from here. I am -sure I can find the tree easily enough.” - -“It is more than likely they have found the tunnel,” answered Joseph -Morris. “And if so, they will watch it, or block it up.” - -“I’m a-goin’ to take a look,” said the old frontiersman. - -While the majority of the men continued to watch the trading post, to -guard against a possible attack by those inside, the planter, -Barringford, Henry, and Dave walked to the hollow tree. How this was -used before has already been told in another volume of this series. - -It was an easy matter for Sam Barringford to let himself down into the -hollow tree. He had to clear away a little snow, but found the tunnel -practically empty. It was only a small affair, dug for bitter emergency, -and ran directly from the hollow tree under the palisade, and came out -near a corner of the storehouse. It had several turns, around rocks and -roots of trees long since cut down, and it took some time for the old -frontiersman to worm his way along until he reached the vicinity of its -termination. - -To light his way, Barringford had brought along a small torch, and now -he stuck this behind him, in the wall of the tunnel. In front of him was -a large flat stone, covering the end of the passageway. - -He placed his ear to the stone and listened. Not a sound broke the -stillness beyond, and gently but firmly he pushed on one end of the -stone. It was frozen fast, but at last came away, letting down a small -shower of snow. - -“Covered with snow, eh?” he murmured to himself. “So much the better. -They ain’t found it, an’ more’n likely they don’t know a thing about -it.” - -With extreme caution he continued to push upon the stone, until he had -raised up one end a foot or more. Beyond, he now discovered a drift of -snow, covered with an icy crust. All he had to do was to clear away the -snow, break the crust, and step out into the open, less than ten feet -away from the door to the storehouse and stable. - -Not deeming it wise to go further in the daylight, Barringford allowed -the stone to drop into place once more, and wormed his way back to the -hollow tree. The others were anxiously awaiting his return. - -“What did you find?” asked Henry. - -“We can git in that way, if we want to,” answered the old frontiersman, -and related the particulars. - -Dave was for entering the post at once, but Joseph Morris shook his -head, and Barringford did the same. - -“We had better wait until nightfall,” said the planter, “and in the -meantime perhaps we can throw Jean Bevoir off his guard.” - -“Let us pretend to go away,” said Henry. “Have a talk with him, and say -you will come back with a company of regulars from Fort Pitt.” - -This was considered a good suggestion, and a little later Joseph Morris -walked again into the open, waving his white handkerchief. At first -nobody paid attention to him. Then Bevoir showed himself once more. - -“Jean Bevoir, we have talked matters over,” began the planter. “We want -you to consider well before you decide. Will you give up the post, or do -you want us to return to Fort Pitt and bring a company of soldiers here -to fight you?” - -“I vill not give up ze post, no!” shouted the French trader. - -“Then you want us to bring the soldiers from Fort Pitt?” - -“You cannot do zat,” was the reply, but a look of anxiety crossed the -bronzed features of the French rascal. - -“I think I can do it. Captain Ecuyer is my friend, and was the friend of -my brother. He will aid us all he can.” - -“Ze post ees mine, haf I not said so before? Ze _capitaine_ must respect -Jean Bevoir’s rights. Ven he comes here I show heem ze papairs. He must -respect ze document, _oui_.” - -“You have no right to this place, and I know it,” answered Joseph -Morris, doggedly. “Then you will not give up?” - -“No, nevair!” - -“Then, when we bring the soldiers, the consequence be on your own head,” -said the trader, and walked away to join his friends. He was just -entering the forest when a rifle shot rang out and the bullet whistled -close to his ear. - -“The skunks!” roared Sam Barringford. “Didn’t I tell ye they wasn’t to -be trusted?” - -“I think I have fooled them,” said the planter. The shot had somewhat -disturbed him, but he did not show it. “Now, let us pretend to break -camp and march away.” - -This was done with great skillfulness, at a point where those in the -post could see what was going on. Everything was packed on the horses -and they moved off, up the Ohio. They continued to journey onward until -darkness and a bend in the river hid them from the view of their enemy. - -“Now to get back, and get ready for the attack,” said Joseph Morris, and -he had Barringford lead the way, by a route deep in the forest, where it -would be impossible for anybody at the post to catch sight of them. - -The marching away of the expedition was viewed with interest by Jean -Bevoir, Moon Eye, and their followers. At first they imagined it might -be a ruse, but then concluded that Joseph Morris really intended to go -to Fort Pitt for assistance. - -“What he said about Captain Ecuyer is true,” said Benoit Vascal to Jean -Bevoir, in their own tongue. “The Morrises were warm friends of the fort -commandant. He will surely do all he can for them.” - -“The soldiers will aid their own,” said Moon Eye. “Did not these whites -get aid when Moon Eye was fighting them? If they reach Fort Pitt and -obtain assistance it may go hard with all of us.” - -“It is a long journey,” said Jean Bevoir. - -“Yes, but spring is at hand,” answered Moon Eye. “Soon the trail will be -open, and then the journey will not be difficult. The soldiers will be -glad of a march, after being housed up so long.” - -“And what do you advise?” asked the French trader. - -“Let us follow them on the sly and shoot them down. They will not dream -of our leaving the post. We can fall upon them when they are asleep and -kill them to a man.” - -“Yes! yes! let us do that!” said a warrior who was eager for bloodshed. -“Remember the saying, ‘the dead bear brings no news to her cubs.’” - -A general council of war was held, and the upshot of the matter was that -it was decided to leave the post under the care of two of the Frenchmen -and two Indians. All of the others, including Moon Eye, Jean Bevoir, and -Benoit Vascal, prepared to follow up the Morris expedition as soon as it -seemed safe to do so. - -Unconscious of what was in the minds of their enemy, our friends made a -long detour through the mighty forest and arrived in the vicinity of the -post once more shortly after midnight. They found everything remarkably -quiet and not a single light of any kind was showing. - -Barringford lost no time in entering the tunnel, followed by Dave and -Henry. The others came after, each taking his gun and hunting knife with -him. - -“Be cautious,” warned Joseph Morris. “Do not risk a shot needlessly.” - -When the old frontiersman reached the flat stone he shoved it up as -before. All was still quiet and dark, and scraping away some of the snow -he broke the icy covering and peered forth. He could see the storehouse -and stable and above was the clear sky, with the stars twinkling far -overhead. - -“Nobuddy in sight,” he whispered, after a careful survey of the -surroundings. - -He stepped out of the tunnel and like a ghost vanished into a dark angle -of the storehouse building. Dave and Henry followed him, and then came -Joseph Morris and some others. - -The hearts of all beat rapidly, for they felt that they were taking -their lives in their hands. A discovery might mean death for many and -perhaps all of them. - -“Ha! I see a man!” whispered Barringford, and pointed out a Frenchman, -stationed, gun in hand, near the stockade gate. - -“And there is an Indian,” put in Dave, pointing to another portion of -the post defense. - -Try their best they could see no others on guard. The Frenchman and the -Indian walked up and down slowly, stopping every few minutes to peer -through one loophole or another. - -“The others must be asleep,” whispered Joseph Morris. “If so we may be -able to surprise them completely.” - -In a few minutes all of the party were out of the tunnel. Several looked -into the stable and storehouse, to find both empty, saving for stores, -pelts, and horses. - -“Let us move to the main building,” whispered Joseph Morris. “At the -first sign of an outbreak, fire on them and show them no quarter.” - -“They need expect no quarter from me, Jean Bevoir especially,” answered -Dave, grimly. - -The entrance to the main building was gained, and still they caught -sight of nobody but the two guards near the stockade. Softly the door -was pushed open and Sam Barringford entered, followed by Joseph Morris -and Dave and Henry. - -A bright fire burnt in the big open chimney, casting a ruddy glare -around the room. In front of the fire, on the floor, lay an Indian, -snoring lustily. On a couch in a corner rested a Frenchman, also asleep. - -Without awaking the sleepers, Dave and Henry glided into the sleeping -room of the post. Here it was dark, and they had to go slow, for fear of -arousing somebody. They felt their way from bunk to bunk, listening -intently and putting forth cautious hands. Then they tiptoed their way -back to the main room. - -“The bunks are empty!” whispered Dave, and Henry nodded. - -“All of them?” queried Joseph Morris. - -“Yes.” - -“They must be outside—maybe they are going to trap us after all,” came -softly from Sam Barringford. “We had better——” - -He stopped short and raised his long rifle. The sleeping Frenchman had -roused up and was staring at the intruders. He rubbed his eyes in -bewilderment. - -“What want you here?” he stammered, in French. - -“Silence!” came sternly from the old frontiersman. “Silence, ef ye don’t -want to be kilt!” - -The Frenchman understood little of English, but he understood enough, -and he calmly submitted to being bound with a rope that was handy. In -the midst of the work the Indian awoke, gave a swift look around, and -started for the doorway, uttering a war-cry as he did so. - -“Stop!” cried Joseph Morris, and fired his rifle at the red warrior. His -aim was true, and the Indian went down, wounded in the back. Then came a -shout from outside in French, followed by a war-whoop. - -“We must fight for it now!” cried Henry. - -“I am ready!” answered Dave. “Come on! The quicker we get at them the -better!” - - - - - CHAPTER XXVII - HOLDING THE TRADING POST - - -All ran out of the main building, looking in every direction for the -enemy. They expected to be confronted by at least a dozen Frenchmen and -Indians, and when these did not appear James Morris and his followers -were much perplexed. - -The Indian at the stockade fired on them, and so did the Frenchman at -the gate. Our friends fired in return, and the Frenchman went down with -two bullets in his breast. The Indian was slightly wounded, and as he -saw the others pouring from the main building, he turned back to the -stockade, ran to one of the corners, climbed up and over, and -disappeared from view. - -“He is running away!” cried Dave. “Something is wrong here! Where can -Jean Bevoir be?” - -Nobody attempted to answer that question, just then. The party scattered -throughout the grounds and the buildings, looking in all directions for -the enemy. But nobody was found outside of those already seen. - -“They have disappeared,” said Joseph Morris. “Can it be possible that -they have gone out to follow us up?” - -“That’s it!” shouted Henry. “They didn’t want us to go to Fort Pitt for -aid.” - -“Henry must have hit the truth,” said Sam Barringford. “It’s a lucky -thing fer us. We have gained the post with no loss at all.” - -“But it remains to be seen if we can hold it,” answered Joseph Morris, -quickly. - -“Don’t forget that Indian who got away,” added Dave. “He will carry the -news to the others as soon as he can, and they will be about our ears in -no time.” - -“We must prepare to defend this place,” said his uncle. “I will call the -men together, and we can go over our plans. Dave, you know more of this -post than I do. How had we best distribute the men?” - -Dave told of what had been done in the past, and soon the men were put -on guard, two at the gate, one at each corner of the stockade, and the -others at a point in the center of the grounds, from which they could -run to any spot where they were needed. Each man was armed with two -rifles, and some of them had a pistol besides,—old Spanish weapons and -extra long. - -“We must not forget that our horses are still in the forest and likewise -that sick man,” said Joseph Morris. “If possible, we ought to bring them -in.” - -“If you say so, I’ll go after them,” answered his son. “I am not afraid -to do it.” - -At first the planter demurred, but finally consented to let Henry go, -accompanied by Sam Barringford. They did not wish their pack-train to -fall into the hands of Bevoir and Moon Eye, for that would give the -enemy a great advantage. Besides, they felt it their duty to care for -the stranger who had sought their aid. - -“You must return with all possible speed,” said Joseph Morris, when -Henry and Barringford were departing. “If you hurry you will likely get -back before Jean Bevoir starts to return to this post.” - -The two departed by climbing the stockade at one of the corners, and -lost not a moment in getting into the shelter of the timber. Here they -looked around carefully, but could not find a single trace of their -enemy or of the Indian who had vanished. - -The Indian who had been wounded in the short fight at the post refused -to speak when questioned. Dave recognized him as one of Moon Eye’s -followers whom he had met before. When the red warrior saw the youth he -merely scowled and turned his face away. A little later he lapsed into -unconsciousness, and nobody paid further attention to him, thinking he -was about to breathe his last. - -The Frenchman who had been captured was a man Henry and Barringford had -met several times. He was a lawless and brutal fellow, given to heavy -drinking, and he took his capture with an air of bravo and told them to -do their worst if they chose. - -“What has become of Jean Bevoir?” asked Mr. Morris of the man. - -“Jean, he ees ze big fool,” was the answer. “He go to catch you—you come -here an’ tak post. By gar! dat ees big fool t’ing!” - -“Tell me about my father,” said Dave. “How was he wounded and how did he -die?” - -“Vat I know ’bout dat? I no keel heem! I no see heem ’t all. Jean, he -fix dat, I tell you!” And the Frenchman winked suggestively. - -“I suppose you mean that Bevoir killed my father,” went on Dave, -bitterly. - -“I no say dat, no. You ask Jean—he tell truth—I haf noddings to do wid -dat, no!” And then the Frenchman would say no more on the subject, nor -would he say what had become of the others who had accompanied James -Morris. Evidently he did not wish to render himself liable in any manner -if it could be avoided. - -Slowly the night wore away and morning dawned, bright and clear. To the -chagrin of those at the post neither Henry nor Barringford showed -himself, nor did they see anything of the sick man or the horses. - -“I hope they have not gotten into trouble,” said Joseph Morris. “Yet, if -all went well, they should have been here long before this.” - -It was about nine o’clock in the morning when they heard several shots -at a distance. They watched eagerly, and presently saw Sam Barringford, -on horseback, riding with might and main for the post. - -“Sam is coming!” cried Dave, running to the gate. “Put down the bars and -let him in!” - -The bars were loosened and the big gate opened, and a minute later the -old frontiersman swept through the opening. He was so exhausted he -almost dropped from his steed. - -“Is Henry here?” were his first words. - -“No,” answered several. - -At this announcement the face of the frontiersman fell. He glanced back -toward the forest. - -“It’s too bad, but we can’t do nuthing now. Bar the gate ag’in, afore -they git in on ye!” - -His directions were followed, and soon after this the party under Jean -Bevoir and Moon Eye swept into view. They were in a great rage, and -doubly so when they saw how they had been tricked out of the possession -of the trading post. - -[Illustration: The old frontiersman swept through the opening.—_Page -258._] - -“Surrendair!” cried Jean Bevoir, as he came closer. “Zat ees my -property, an’ I call upon you to surrendair!” - -“Keep your distance, or we will fire upon you!” answered Joseph Morris, -and to check the advance he had one of his men fire over the enemy’s -head. At this the advancing party lost no time in secreting itself -behind the neighboring trees. - -“Keep a strict watch and sound the alarm at the first outbreak,” said -the planter, and then walked to where Dave was assisting Sam Barringford -from his steed. - -The frontiersman’s story was soon told. He and Henry had gone straight -to where the pack-train and the sick man had been left, to find the man -gone and also one of the horses. They were looking around for the -individual and the steed when five Indians pounced upon them and made -them prisoners. The Indians took them into the forest and also led the -horses away. From their talk they were evidently a portion of Moon Eye’s -tribe that was journeying to the post to join their chief. What had -become of the sick man none of them appeared to know. - -“We watched our chances,” continued Sam Barringford, “and jest when we -thought as how we could do it, Henry an’ I made a break fer liberty. We -got on two o’ the hosses an’ rode as if the Old Nick war after us. The -Injuns fired at us, but their aim was no good so far ez I was consarned. -In the woods Henry an’ I got separated. I thought he rode straight fer -here, but I must have been mistook on that p’int. I was coming along -full bent when I spotted Jean Bevoir and Moon Eye and thet crowd. Then I -knowed I must ride fer all I was wuth, an’ I did it.” - -“Then Henry must be somewhere in the forest,” said Dave. - -“Yes, but if he’s alive or dead I don’t know,” answered Sam Barringford, -soberly. - -“I must find out about this,” said Joseph Morris. “And I must do it at -once.” - -“You cannot go out now, Uncle Joe,” said Dave, hastily. “They would -shoot you on the spot!” - -“No, ye can’t go now,” added Barringford. - -A short time passed, and then came a hail from without. Looking they saw -Jean Bevoir waving a bit of dirty white cloth. - -“He wants another pow-wow,” said a frontiersman at the gate. - -“If I were you I’d not show myself,” said Dave, to his uncle, but Joseph -Morris mounted the short ladder nevertheless. - -“What do you want now?” demanded the planter. - -“I vish to make terms,” began Jean Bevoir, and then went over his old -story of his rights regarding the post. - -“Jean Bevoir, I do not wish to listen to you,” answered the planter. -“This post belongs to David Morris, and that is the end of it. The best -you can do is to take yourself off and be quick about it. All of this -land now belongs to the English, and you Frenchmen have no rights here -at all. If you want to establish a post you must do it in French -territory. The war with your country and with the Indians is at an end, -and you must act according to the treaty of peace. You are accountable -for the death of my brother, and that is bad enough, without making -matters worse. Go away, and never let me see your face again.” - -“I vill go—but I shall come back!” shouted Jean Bevoir, in a rage, and -shaking his fist at Joseph Morris he retreated once more behind the -trees. - -“Did he say anything about Henry?” asked Dave. - -“No. I will ask him,” answered his uncle, and started to call to Jean -Bevoir, when Barringford stopped him. - -“Don’t ye do it,” said the old frontiersman. “Maybe they don’t know -Henry is still out, an’ if so, it won’t be wise to let ’em know.” - -“That is true,” answered the planter, thoughtfully. “I will say nothing. -But pray Heaven that my boy is safe!” - -After that the best part of the day passed slowly. The only excitement -occurred when the French prisoner broke his bonds and tried to escape. -He was overtaken by one of the frontiersmen and a desperate hand-to-hand -fight ensued, in which the frontiersman was stabbed in the shoulder. But -then the Frenchman received a pistol bullet in his abdomen and fell -flat. He was picked up and taken to the main building of the post, where -he received such medical attention as the limited means of the garrison -afforded. This did small good, however, and he died at sunrise on the -following day. Before he died he tried to tell Dave something about -James Morris, but couldn’t speak clearly. - -“What do you want to say?” asked Dave. “Tell me if you can.” - -“Your fadder, he ees—he ees——” said the wounded man, and that was as far -as he could get. He gasped for breath, tried to sit up,—and a minute -later all was over. - -“He must have known something,” said Dave, to his uncle. “What was it?” - -The planter shook his head. “Do not ask me, Dave,” he said, gently. “It -is too bad! First your father, and now it may be Henry!” And he turned -away to hide the tears that sprang into his eyes. - -Dave could not content himself, and wandered idly from one part of the -trading post to another. His father was continually in his mind. He -missed his parent as he had never done before. - -Suddenly as he walked along one of the men came running towards him. - -“I say, Dave, have you seen that redskin that was wounded in the fight?” -he called out. “The one your uncle shot?” - -“No, I haven’t seen him.” - -“He is gone—we can’t find him anywhere. We all thought he was dying, but -it looks now as if he had gotten away,” went on the man. - -He turned into the stable and then into a small compartment of the -storehouse, where the powder for the post was usually kept. A moment -later he came rushing into the open yelling wildly. - -“The Injun’s in there!” he gasped. “He has got a torch and is going to -set off all the powder and blow us sky-high!” - - - - - CHAPTER XXVIII - IN WHICH A BATTERING RAM IS USED - - -The announcement that the frontiersman made filled Dave and the others -who heard it with horror. For the moment the youth could not believe the -evidence of his senses. - -“Going to blow us up?” he queried. - -“Yes—look for yourself, if you don’t believe it!” And the man ran -further away than ever. - -“What does he say?” asked Joseph Morris, who had just come up. - -“He says the Indian you wounded is in the storehouse and is going to set -fire to the casks of powder stored there.” - -“In there?” returned the planter. - -“Let us stop him—if we can,” went on Dave, and rushed forward, without -considering the great risk he was assuming by such action. - -He ran into the storehouse, and his uncle came at his heels. Sure -enough, the wounded Indian was there, firebrand in hand. He was waving -it over a powder keg that was broken open and muttering a weird chant. -He knew that he was mortally wounded, and if he had to die he wanted his -hated enemies to die with him. - -Dave and his uncle gazed on the scene as if bound by a spell. A single -spark from that torch dropped into the powder would mean death and -destruction to nearly everybody and everything in the post. The Indian -was calm and continued to chant. - -Presently, with a start, Dave broke the spell that bound him. He made -one swift leap, caught the torch from behind and sent it whizzing away -through the open doorway. Some sparks dropped to the floor and as they -fell his foot covered them. - -The Indian, taken completely off his guard, turned in consternation. The -youth sprang upon him and bore him to the floor. Then Joseph Morris -leaped in, and together they dragged the miscreant out of the building. - -A crowd of half a dozen had collected. They saw the torch and saw the -red man pushed and dragged into the open. They waited for an explosion, -but it did not come. Then all began to breathe easier. - -“Dave, you saved us all!” It was Joseph Morris who spoke. The great -beads of perspiration were standing out on his forehead. - -“I—I am glad if I did,” answered the youth. Now the danger was past, he -found himself trembling like a leaf. - -“Kill that Injun!” was the cry. “Kill him! He ain’t fit to live!” - -Swiftly the crowd turned on the red man. The Indian had sunk on the -ground in a heap. His wound had broken afresh and he was gasping -heavily. Barringford ran to him, hunting knife in hand. Then the old -frontiersman shook his head and motioned the others back. - -“He’s dying, men,” he said. “Let him alone.” - -“Are ye sure o’ thet, Sam?” asked one man. - -“Dead sartin.” And Barringford’s words proved true, for the Indian -expired soon after. - -The alarm had put everybody in the post on his mettle, and a strict hunt -was made, to see if anybody else was in hiding around the place. Nobody -was found, and gradually the garrison settled down. - -“It is maddening to think that Henry is missing,” said Joseph Morris, -shortly after the noon hour. “I would give a great deal to know what has -become of him.” - -“And I’d like to know what Jean Bevoir intends to do next,” returned his -nephew. - -“He and his followers may wait until to-night and then attack us.” - -Slowly the rest of the day wore away, and during that time all in the -post made themselves as comfortable as possible. An examination of the -stores showed that the Frenchmen and Indians had provided themselves -with plenty of food, so the present garrison would not suffer in that -respect. - -“So far as rations are concerned, we can hold this place for a month,” -said Joseph Morris. “And as the river is so near, they cannot very well -close off our water supply.” - -“Jean Bevoir won’t wait to starve us out,” said Barringford. “He’ll -attack us, or do somethin’ else, mark my words.” - -An early supper was had, and then the men on guard began a closer -vigilance than ever. Every tree and bush and every rock without was -closely watched. The tunnel had been shut up in such a way that it could -not be used for the time being. - -So far there had been little wind, but now a strong breeze came up. -Hardly had it started than a shower of fire arrows came sailing over the -stockade, to land in many directions. - -“They are going to try to set fire to the buildings!” cried Dave. - -“Put out the arrows!” cried Joseph Morris, and ran for some wet bags. -With the bags the majority of the fire arrows were quickly extinguished. -Two lodged on the roof of the main building, and Dave climbed up to put -them out. - -“Be careful,—don’t expose yourself!” exclaimed his uncle. - -The instant Dave made a whack with his wet bag at the fire arrow several -other arrows flew in the direction, one striking his hunting shirt. The -flame on it burnt fiercely and set fire to the youth’s garments. - -“Look out, you’re burning!” cried one man. - -“Roll down in the snow!” came from Sam Barringford. - -This was good advice, and Dave lost no time in following it. Down he -came in a pile of snow and rolled over and over, and the small blaze was -immediately extinguished. - -One of the arrows shot last had got a good hold between the logs of the -roof and was burning at a lively rate. - -“We ought to have some water,” said Joseph Morris. - -“Snow will do,” answered the old frontiersman, and taking up a -good-sized chunk, he hurled it at the arrow. His aim was good and the -fire was blotted out. Then others took up handfuls of snow, and as soon -as the burning arrows appeared, covered them completely; so that that -new danger was quickly past. - -The Indians under Moon Eye had hoped much from their burning arrows and -were deeply chagrined to see them put out so easily. They sent out half -a hundred or less and then ceased operations. - -“The snow has aided them,” grunted the chief in disgust. “We must try -some other plan.” - -“Why not get a battering ram and ram down the gate?” asked Benoit Vascal -of Jean Bevoir, in French. - -The Frenchman suggested this to Moon Eye. The Indian leader was willing, -provided the Frenchmen would use the ram, leaving the Indians to enter -the post after the gate was down. - -During the early part of the evening, another band of red men and -several Frenchmen had come up, friendly to Moon Eye and to Bevoir. They -joined forces with those besieging the post, making those without much -stronger than before. Jean Bevoir promised the Indians and his -countrymen all sorts of things if they would aid in capturing the post -and in killing all the whites found defending it. - -The plan to batter down the gate was carefully made. A fair-sized tree -was cut down and trimmed off, leaving just enough of the branches to -make good handles. This battering ram was brought up in the forest in a -direct line with the stockade gate. At the front was placed a shield of -loose branches and bark. - -It the meantime, it was decided that six Indians should go to the rear -of the post and make a demonstration there, shouting loudly and firing -their guns and arrows,—doing this to draw the attention of the post -defenders to that point. When the alarm was at its height, the battering -ram was to be used with all force and as swiftly as possible. The moment -the gate was down, Indians and Frenchmen were to rush into the post -grounds and slaughter all who opposed them. - -Having eaten his supper after the others, Sam Barringford walked around -the entire stockade, questioning all who were on guard. Nobody had seen -either a Frenchman or an Indian, although constantly on the alert. - -“Tell ye wot I heard though,” said one frontiersman to Barringford. “I -heard ’em choppin’ down a tree over yonder.” - -“Sure it war a tree, Collins?” asked the old frontiersman, with -interest. - -“I am.” - -“Humph!” - -Sam Barringford said no more, but went straight to Joseph Morris. - -“We want to watch thet gate harder nor ever,” he announced. - -“Why, Sam?” - -“They have been cuttin’ down a tree.” - -“Ha! Do you think they wish to use it for a battering ram?” - -“Don’t know wot else they’d want it fer. Anyway, it won’t hurt to watch -the gate extry well.” - -“I’ll have it done,” answered the planter, and was as good as his word. - -Another hour went by and still the silence around the trading post -continued. A few of the men were sleepy, but they were ordered to keep -awake. - -“Our sleeping will be done in the daytime after this—until the alarm is -at an end,” said Joseph Morris. - -Suddenly there burst upon the night air a chorus of wild yells, coming -from a point at the rear of the stockade. The six Indians sent to that -place appeared, but took care to keep out of range of the frontiersmen’s -rifles. - -“They are coming—over the back stockade!” was the cry. - -“Don’t run that way yet!” roared Sam Barringford. “Watch the gate! Watch -the gate!” - -Some of the men paused in bewilderment. Looking to the front, they could -see nobody. From the rear a shot rang out, followed by several others, -and then came a shower of arrows. - -“Pretend to go back—and then turn and watch the gate,” ordered Joseph -Morris. - -The men obeyed. But Dave remained at the gate, his eye glued to a near -loophole. Only the stars were shining, so he had to watch closely in -order to see anything at all. - -The demonstration at the rear of the post went on, and now the Indians -became a little bolder, running to within fifty yards of the palisade. -As a consequence one received a bullet wound in his arm, and then all -slipped behind the trees. - -“Here they come!” yelled Dave, suddenly. “Here they come! Sam, quick! -They have a battering ram!” - -“Jest as I supposed!” returned the old frontiersman. “Give it to ’em, -Dave!” - -Crack! went the rifle of the youth and one of the Frenchmen carrying the -ram staggered for a moment, grazed in the side. Then the crowd came -forward, swiftly and silently. Barringford took aim and fired, and -another Frenchman dropped back, seriously wounded. But the others did -not pause. - -Crash! The battering ram struck the gate with great force, causing it to -quiver from top to bottom. But the posts and the oaken bars held, and -those outside had to run back with the tree-trunk. - -“Fire on ’em! Fire on ’em!” yelled Barringford, and he and Dave let -drive a second time, and two other defenders followed suit. The men with -the battering ram came up, but just as they were within three yards of -the gate one of the leaders staggered and fell, shot through the knee. -This confused the others, and the second blow on the gate was, -consequently, a feeble one. - -“Again! Again!” shrieked Jean Bevoir. “Up with the log!” he added, in -French. “Remember the reward, if you get into the post! Now then, all -together!” - -Once more those outside raised the battering ram and ran back with it. -They paused for a moment, to gather their strength. Then they hurled -themselves forward, and the ram hit the gate with a crash that was -deafening, causing the splinters to fly in all directions. - - - - - CHAPTER XXIX - FROM ENEMIES TO FRIENDS - - -It is now necessary to go back a little, to learn how poor Henry fared, -after he and Sam Barringford escaped from the Indians who had made them -prisoners. - -Henry was on a good horse, but in leaping over some rocks the steed went -down into a hollow, striking its head heavily. The youth was thrown off, -and he and his steed were both stunned. - -When Henry recovered he was again in the clutches of the red men. Three -of them surrounded him and threatened to take his life on the spot if he -did not submit, and they soon after bound his hands behind him with -rawhides. The horse was found to be still fit for use, and Henry was -bound on the animal’s back. Then the party of Indians journeyed off to -parts unknown. - -Henry had suffered before, but now his red captors treated him worse -than ever. They were a low grade of warriors, in reality outcasts, and -hardly knew what to do with their white prisoner. They moved on for -several miles, and then went into camp near the bank of the Ohio. Here -they took Henry from the horse and fastened him to a tree. They had some -food for themselves, but did not offer their captive a mouthful. They -did, however, give him a drink, for which he was thankful. - -Henry wondered if Barringford had escaped or been shot down. He saw no -new scalp among the red men, which gave him a slight hope. - -“If he got away maybe he will bring somebody to rescue me,” thought the -youth, but hour after hour went by, and nobody came near the camp. - -Fortunately for Henry, the weather was exceedingly mild, so that he -suffered little from the cold. He tried several times to question the -Indians, but they understood little English and were not inclined to -answer the questions he put. One slapped him in the face and another put -a handful of soft snow down his back. Then they went away, to talk among -themselves, leaving him alone. - -He tried with might and main to either slip or break the bonds which -bound him, but with no success. He looked around for some other means of -getting away, but nothing presented itself. - -Soon after consulting among themselves, some of the Indians went away, -leaving only one red man on guard. This fellow, a warrior with a visage -horribly pitted from smallpox, and a squint in one eye, wrapped himself -in his blanket and sat down on a log, his bow and arrows across his -knees. - -A half-hour slipped by and the Indian dropped into a doze. Henry watched -him with interest, and a little later saw that the warrior was fast -asleep. - -“Now, if only I could break these bonds and get away!” sighed the youth -to himself. - -Once again he went at the rawhide, but all he could do was to cut his -wrists. At last he gave up in despair. - -The other Indians came back soon after this, bringing some additional -warriors with them. One could speak English, and he questioned Henry -closely about himself and about those at the trading post. - -“Let me go and I will reward you well,” said Henry, after he saw that -the red men had no intention of giving him his liberty. - -Instead of agreeing to this, the Indian asked the youth about Jean -Bevoir and Moon Eye. Then Henry was left once again to himself, while -two Indians went off on a run,—to interview the French trader, as it -afterwards proved. - -The upshot of the matter was that Henry was taken to the camp Jean -Bevoir and Moon Eye had made in the forest. Bevoir hailed the coming of -the young prisoner with keen delight. - -“Ha! so ve haf at least von of dem!” said he, rubbing his hands -together. “How you like to be prisonair, hey?” - -“Not at all,” answered Henry, bluntly. “Now you have me, what do you -intend to do, Jean Bevoir?” - -“You shall soon see, _oui_! I haf not forgot ze past, no! no! I tak care -of you, by gar!” And Jean Bevoir shook his fist in poor Henry’s face. - -“You will gain nothing by mistreating me,” went on the youth, as -steadily as he could. “Sooner or later the law will get hold of you. The -best thing you can do is to let me go.” - -“I not let you go. Ve shall fight zem at ze post. Ve vin sure—but if ve -lose, hey? I haf you, hey? Vat can za do to Jean Bevoir if you be a -prisonair, hey? If za keel me den my men keel you! Now you understand, -_oui_?” - -Henry did understand, and it made his heart sink lower than ever. By -holding him a prisoner the Frenchman expected to keep himself from harm. -If he was captured he would warn his captors not to harm him, otherwise -Henry must suffer. - -The preparations for attacking the post were now going forward, and a -little later Henry was removed in the care of two Indians to a station -still further up the Ohio. Here some of the red men had something of a -village, and here, to his astonishment, the youth found many of the -horses of the pack-train and also the sick man who had so mysteriously -disappeared. - -The sick man lay in a wigwam on some blankets. Strange to relate, his -recent adventures had not made him any weaker than he had formerly been; -in fact, they appeared to have helped him. - -“I, too, tried to get away, on one of the horses,” he said. “But some -Indians followed me up, and captured me. They brought me to this place, -and an old Indian medicine man gave me some medicine which has helped me -wonderfully.” - -The man then wanted to know something about Henry, and the youth told -him as much as he deemed necessary. The two were in the midst of the -conversation when two Indians came in and hustled Henry out of the -wigwam and to another part of the village. - -“White people talk too much,” said one of the Indians, thereby giving -the youth to understand that they did not wish the pair to consult -together. - -From what little Henry had learned he was now certain that a strong -attack was to be made on the trading post. As a consequence he wanted to -get free more than ever, that he might warn his friends. - -His bonds were not the same as those which had kept him a prisoner -before, and by working diligently over them, he managed at last to get -one hand free. The other quickly followed, and then he freed his feet. - -He was alone in the wigwam, the Indians in the village having gathered -to hold a pow-wow, the question being how much they should do to aid -Moon Eye and Jean Bevoir. The Indians had no desire to become hurt in a -battle, yet they were anxious to obtain some of the many gifts which -Bevoir had promised them in case of a victory over the English. - -With great caution Henry looked out of the wigwam and surveyed the -situation. The camp was close to the river bank and was backed up by the -virgin forest, which, at this point, was rough and uncertain. It would -be an easy matter to hide in the forest, but the question arose, what -should he do when he got there? - -“Well, anything is better than being a prisoner,” he mused. “I’ll take -what I can lay my hands on and get out.” - -He looked about him and managed to secure an old hunting knife and -likewise a pretty fair bow and several arrows. It was growing dark, and -at the risk of being seen he stole to a place where the Indians had -stored some blankets and some provisions. He supplied himself with what -he wanted, and then, like a ghost, glided into the mighty forest. - -“Now for the trading post,” he muttered to himself. “By hook or crook, I -must get there, and pray Heaven I get there before it is too late!” - -He knew that in order to reach the post he would have to keep close to -the river. He imagined the trading post was about three miles away, -although he was by no means sure. - -Traveling through the forest in the dark proved to be a harder task than -Henry had anticipated. He went plunging along until several falls -knocked the wind completely out of him and barked his shins mightily. At -last he had to give it up and turned to the river, resolved to travel on -the ice, even though the danger might be greater. - -Coming down to the open he gazed around, and seeing nobody, stepped on -the ice. It appeared to be firm, and he started on a swift trot, -straight for the trading post. - -Crack! Henry had not been on the ice over a minute when this ominous -sound greeted him. He had come to where the surface was more than -slushy. The ice bent beneath him. - -“This won’t do!” he cried, and tried to turn toward the shore once more. -But the movement came too late; down went the ice and Henry with it, and -the next instant he was over his head in the chilling water. - -Had Henry not been so robust and such a good swimmer he would have -perished on the spot. As it was, the coldness of the water almost -paralyzed him, and when he went down he could do little but gasp and -splutter and reach out blindly. Then, when he came up, his head hit the -under surface of the ice, and down he went as before. - -The sturdy youth now realized that he had a life or death struggle -before him. No one was at hand to give him aid, and if he was to be -saved he must do it himself. As he came up once more he clutched at the -under surface of the ice and felt around until he found something of an -opening. Then, with might and main, he pulled himself up, until his head -and shoulders were out of the water. It was high time, for he could no -longer hold his breath. - -The ice was all around him, but so rotten that it threatened at every -instant to break away and let him down again. He was less than ten yards -from the bank of the river, but try his best he could make no headway -toward safety. - -As Henry was wondering how long he could stand the cold and keep from -losing his grip something along the shore attracted his attention. He -gave a closer look and saw three Indians stealing along. That they were -enemies he had not the slightest doubt, yet he hailed their appearance -with a certain sense of joy. They could save him, even though they might -make him their prisoner once more. - -“Help!” he called, as loudly as he could. “Help!” - -The Indians were at first startled by the call, and in a trice fled -behind some trees and out of sight. But then they saw the youth’s head -and noted his plight and came forth and ran to the edge of the river -bank. - -“Help me!” went on Henry. “Do not let me drown!” - -“We help,” grunted one of the Indians, and threw out a lasso he chanced -to be carrying. It fell within Henry’s reach, and he quickly grasped it. -Then the three red men hauled him to a place of safety. - -“My friend Henry!” cried one of the red men, in amazement. - -“White Buffalo!” gasped the youth. “Can it be possible? How came you -here?” - -“White Buffalo is journeying to the trading post. He heard that harm had -befallen his old friends,” answered the old chief of the Delawares. “Is -his friend Henry alone?” - -“Yes. I was out with Sam Barringford, and we were captured by some -unfriendly Indians,” returned Henry, and related his story in detail, to -which White Buffalo listened with close attention. Then the chief asked -about Joseph Morris, Dave, and also about Jean Bevoir and Moon Eye. - -“Bevoir and Moon Eye are snakes, not fit to live,” said White Buffalo. -“A runner brought me the news of what was being done. If they have slain -my friend James Morris both of them shall die. White Buffalo swears it -by the Great Spirit.” - -“Have you only these two warriors with you?” - -“No, close at hand White Buffalo has two score men—the flower of his -warriors. Our tribe is united and in the future all will fight only for -the English. We shall aid in driving the French and the bad Indians from -the land.” - -“Good for you!” cried Henry. The news made his heart give a bound. “If -you intend to help us, the quicker you get to the trading post the -better.” - -“It shall be as my brother Henry wills,” answered the chief. “But Henry -cannot travel while he is wet and cold. Here, let him take White -Buffalo’s blanket,” and the chief passed it over. - -“Thank you, the blanket and walking will keep me warm. Let us get your -men together without delay and start for the post. For all I know the -attack may have already begun!” - -They left the vicinity of the Ohio and plunged straight into the forest. -While hurrying along White Buffalo explained that he had been out -scouting, to note how matters were going. In their march westward they -had encountered several wandering Indians who had told them of some of -the doings of Jean Bevoir and Moon Eye. - -“I cannot believe that my friend and brother, James Morris, is dead,” -said the old chief, sadly. “It is hard upon my young friend Dave.” - -“That it is,” answered Henry. “I am afraid Dave won’t care for the post -any more, even if it is saved.” - -As soon as they came to the Indians’ stopping-place White Buffalo -delivered a brief address to his braves. They were perfectly willing to -do whatever he wanted of them; and in a few minutes the whole party set -off for the trading post. - - - - - CHAPTER XXX - FOR LIFE OR DEATH - - -“The gate is giving way!” cried one of the frontiersmen, when the -battering ram had struck it once more with tremendous force. - -“This way, everybody!” called out Joseph Morris. “We must fight for it -now!” - -Half a dozen were already stationed at convenient loopholes and were -pouring in a constant fire on the Frenchmen. Several went down, but the -others kept at the work. Jean Bevoir had furnished them with all they -wished of strong liquor, and many were reckless to the last degree. - -On the edge of the forest Moon Eye waited with the majority of the -savage warriors under him. He saw the gate quiver and splinter, and -then, as there came another onslaught, ordered his braves to advance. On -they came, yelling like demons, and sending a flight of arrows over the -stockade. - -Sam Barringford was in his element, and from a loophole nearest to the -gate he continued to shoot at the Frenchmen. But some of the attackers -had stuck slabs of wood into their girdles in front, and these slabs -acted as shields. - -“They are coming again!” cried Dave. He stood with his eye to a -loophole, his gun smoking from a recent discharge. “They are bound to -get in.” - -“Look at the Indians!” shrieked one of the frontiersmen. “They have been -reinforced! There must be half a hundred of them!” - -“If they come in, perhaps we had better retreat to the main building,” -suggested Joseph Morris. “We cannot stand up against more than twice our -own number.” - -The Indians who had been making the demonstration in the rear of the -trading post, now came around to the front. At the same time the -Frenchmen prepared for a last attack on the gate. On they came with a -force that nothing could resist. Crash! came the battering ram and snap! -crash! went the gate, the oaken bars splitting and breaking and sending -a shower of splinters over those behind. Then the gate went down in the -snow and mud. - -“’Tis down! ’Tis down!” Frenchmen and Indians gave a cheer and a yell. -Those who had been handling the battering ram stepped to one side, and -on swept the warriors under Moon Eye, straight for the opening that had -been created in the stockade. - -“Hold ’em back!” yelled Sam Barringford, stepping to the center of the -gateway. “Give it to ’em hot! Don’t let a skunk o’ ’em git in!” And he -blazed away at one of the leading Indians. The warrior pitched headlong -and the man behind went down on top of him. - -Dave, his uncle, and many of the others, also fired, and four of the red -warriors were either killed or mortally wounded. There was a brief -pause, and then Moon Eye urged his braves to go on. - -“Yes! yes!” yelled Jean Bevoir. “At zem! At zem! Keel zem all! A big, -big reward shall be yours if ve capture ze post!” - -“Go to the front—do some fighting yourself!” growled Benoit Vascal. He -had received an ugly wound in the forearm. - -“I am not afraid,” answered Jean Bevoir, recklessly. He too had been -drinking freely. And forward he rushed, and some of his countrymen with -him, following up the Indians to the gateway of the stockade. - -The battle was now on in all its fury. Two of the frontiersmen had been -shot down and Sam Barringford had been struck in the thigh. Dave was on -the point of using the pistol he carried when a warrior hit him in the -side with an arrow. - -“Dave!” cried Joseph Morris, in alarm, but could say no more, for he -found himself confronted also, and had to fight his best to save his -life. He was struck by a bullet in the shoulder, but the wound was of -small consequence. - -The noise was now terrific, the Indians yelling like demons and the guns -and pistols being discharged freely. Some of the contestants were at it -hand-to-hand, with hunting knives, tomahawks, and clubs. Slowly but -surely the English were driven back from the gateway, and Indians and -French began to crowd into the trading post enclosure. - -“We can’t keep this up! They are too many for us!” gasped one of the -frontiersmen. The blood was pouring from a cut in his cheek. “It’s three -or four to one!” - -“It’s for life or death!” came from another. “Don’t give in! The Indians -will show no mercy! We must fight to a finish!” - -All realized the truth of the speaker’s remarks. The Indians would -surely kill them all or else make them prisoners first and torture them -to death afterwards. It would be better to die fighting than to allow -themselves to be captured. - -In the midst of the noise and excitement a yell was heard from the -forest, and then followed several scattering shots. No one paid -attention to these for the minute, but soon came a yell that caused the -Indians under Moon Eye to listen in consternation. It was the war-cry of -the Delawares, and it told that they were about to enter the fray. - -“What’s that?” came from Joseph Morris. - -“I know what it is!” yelled Dave. His heart gave a bound. “That is White -Buffalo’s war-whoop!” - -“White Buffalo is comin’!” came from Sam Barringford. He gave an -answering cry at the top of his lungs. “I only hope he has a good -followin’! We need ’em!” - -The band under White Buffalo was coming forward on a run, firing -rapidly. With the aged chief was Henry, who had cast aside the blanket, -forgetting in his excitement that he was soaked from his involuntary -bath in the river. - -“Give it to ’em!” shouted Henry, firing a gun that had been given to -him. “Shoot ’em down! They deserve it! And don’t let any of the -Frenchmen get away!” - -The Delawares came up directly behind Moon Eye’s band, and their first -volley of shots and arrows laid four of the enemy low. Then they fired -once more and closed in with hunting knives and hatchets, doing fearful -execution. In the midst of the slaughter was White Buffalo, his teeth -set, his eyes flashing, and his whole demeanor the personification of -courage and daring. Of all the whites he had ever known, the Morrises -were his dearest friends, and he was more than ready to lay down his -life for them. - -The coming of White Buffalo with his band gave fresh courage to Joseph -Morris and those under him, and they renewed with vigor the fight they -were making in the trading post yard. In the meantime the Indians under -Moon Eye and the Frenchmen scarcely knew what to do. - -“The Delawares have come to give us battle!” cried one of Moon Eye’s -under chiefs. - -“They are strong and fresh!” added another, who was sorely wounded in -the leg. - -“We are hemmed in!” came from one of the Frenchmen. “Reinforcements for -the post have arrived!” - -Loud yells and more shots drowned out the words spoken after that. The -din became louder than ever and the smoke rolled upward from every -direction. Henry was in a fierce hand-to-hand fight with one of the -Indians when Benoit Vascal limped past. - -“Ha! It ees you!” shrieked the Frenchman, and made a lunge at Henry with -his hunting knife. But at that moment White Buffalo threw his tomahawk -at Vascal. The rascal received a glancing blow that stretched him -senseless. Then over his body rushed some Indians, and he was, for the -time being, forgotten. - -The coming of the Delawares was disconcerting to Jean Bevoir. It came at -a moment when he had felt certain victory would soon rest with himself -and Moon Eye. He and his followers were practically caught, some inside -of the gateway and some outside, and knew not how to turn. A galling -fire was poured into them by the newcomers, and fully a dozen Indians -and Frenchmen went down never to rise again. Bevoir was hit in the -shoulder and later received a knife stab in the side. - -For fully ten minutes the battle continued, but then, as he saw his -warriors being slaughtered, Moon Eye lost heart, and sounded the -retreat. The Indians under him got out of the gateway as best they could -and scattered to the right and left, some running along the river and -others taking to the shelter of the forest. - -“After them!” said White Buffalo, to his braves, in his native tongue. -“Let not one of them escape. They are vile creatures, not fit to live, -enemies of us all!” And away went his braves after the others, following -Moon Eye’s men for over a mile and killing fully half of them. Moon Eye -himself was struck by a bullet in the back and fell, and a few minutes -later White Buffalo finished the rascal with his tomahawk. - -As soon as they saw that their Indian allies were retreating, the -Frenchmen also tried to retire. All told they now numbered five, -including Jean Bevoir. They sneaked along the stockade until they came -to a point nearest to the mighty forest and then made a break for the -trees. Those at the post fired several shots after them, but these did -no harm. - -“Where is Jean Bevoir?” asked Joseph Morris, as the battle came to an -end. - -“He got away,” answered Barringford, who was panting from his exertions. -“Drat the luck! He’ll come back, I reckon, to make more trouble for us -some other time.” - -“Dave, you are wounded,” said his uncle. - -“It doesn’t matter,” answered the youth, bravely. “Oh, how glad I am -that White Buffalo came up! We should have lost had it not been for him -and his warriors.” - -“He has gone after what’s left of the other redskins,” said one of the -frontiersmen. “I hope he kills them all!” - -Joseph Morris and Dave were overjoyed to see Henry back again and gave -the youth a warm greeting. Torches were lit, and a list made of the dead -and wounded, and the latter were made as comfortable as possible. - -“I vote to go after Jean Bevoir,” said Dave. “I must catch that man and -make him tell me all he knows about father.” - -“An’ I am with ye, lad,” said Barringford. “It ain’t right to let thet -hound git away. He has caused all o’ us trouble enough.” - -“We cannot go away and leave the post alone,” said Joseph Morris. -“Bevoir might come back in the meantime and take possession.” - -“We can fool him,” said Dave. “Let us raise the gate and fasten it in -some manner and then leave a few men on guard. He won’t know but what -all of us are inside.” - -This was considered a good plan, and leaving the dead where they had -fallen, those able to work quickly set the broken gate into place and -propped it fast with some heavy logs. Then seven of the party, including -the planter, Barringford, Dave, and Henry, left the post and took to the -forest in the direction Jean Bevoir and his followers had gone. - -“Be careful,” warned Sam Barringford. “We don’t want to run into a trap. -Remember, Jean Bevoir is foxy, an’ always was.” - -The night was still fairly clear, and they followed the trail through -the wet snow with ease. Evidently the Frenchman had not imagined that he -would be pursued, and so had not taken any precautions to hide his -tracks. The trail led straight forward for nearly a mile, then curved in -the direction of the river. - -“I believe he is bound for that Indian village I was at,” said Henry, -who had, during the brief rest at the post, donned some dry clothing. -“Perhaps he hopes to get aid there. Well, he will be disappointed, I -think, although I am not sure.” - -As they drew closer to the village they advanced with increased caution, -and each member of the party looked to make sure that his weapons were -in proper order. All were tired out, and each was more or less wounded, -but none thought of giving up the task they had undertaken. - -Dave was particularly eager to meet Bevoir and, if possible, make the -rascally French trader a prisoner. He felt that Bevoir was the only one -to give him all the particulars of his father’s death and burial, and he -felt that if the Frenchman got away now he might remain away forever. - -At last they saw a distant gleam of light through the forest and knew -that the Indian camp was not far off. They moved ahead slower than ever. - -“I see somebody moving around!” cried Dave, in a low voice. “I think it -is an Indian.” - -“I see two Indians,” said Sam Barringford. “But they are old men and -unarmed.” - -They drew closer still, until only a fringe of bushes hid the dark camp -from view. The campfire had burned low, and they could see that the most -of the wigwams had been taken down. Evidently what was left of the tribe -were getting ready to leave that vicinity. - -Presently they heard sounds from the opposite side of the camp, and two -Indians and three Frenchmen appeared, leading a number of horses. - -“There is Jean Bevoir now,” whispered Henry. - -“Yes, and those horses are our own,” answered his father. - -The horses were stopped at the doorway of one of the wigwams and an -Indian went in, to appear a moment later leading the sick man whom Henry -had seen but a few hours before. - -“Where are you going to take me?” asked the man, feebly. - -“You vill know zat in ze morning,” answered Jean Bevoir. “You shall ride -a horse.” - -Then Bevoir entered another wigwam. Soon he came forth, dragging another -man by the arm. - -“Don’t!” gasped the man, feebly. “Don’t! I—I cannot stand it! Have a -little mercy, Bevoir, I—I beg of you!” And the man fell in a heap. - -“Git up!” roared Jean Bevoir, savagely. “You shall come with me. Dead or -alive, I shall take you avay!” - -“See! see!” shrieked Dave, forgetting himself completely. “See, it is my -father! Jean Bevoir, let him alone, or I’ll shoot you on the spot!” - - - - - CHAPTER XXXI - DAYS OF PEACE—CONCLUSION - - -It was indeed James Morris who lay on the ground at Jean Bevoir’s feet. - -The trader had not been killed, only seriously wounded, and for days had -lain between life and death, in the care of an old Indian medicine man. -Many a time the French trader had thought to slay him, but had -hesitated, thinking he might some day make use of his prisoner. - -James Morris was still so weak that he could do nothing for himself, yet -Jean Bevoir wanted him to mount a horse and ride away, to a cave up the -river, where, in years gone by, the French trader and his trappers had -had a regular rendezvous. - -It made Dave’s blood boil to see his father so abused, and forgetful of -everything else, he ran forward, leveling his rifle at Bevoir’s head as -he did so. - -“Dave! My son Dave!” cried James Morris, and there was a ring of relief -and joy in his tones. - -“Father!” was all the son answered. He still kept his eyes on the French -trader, who shrank back in consternation. - -“Come on, all of you!” cried Joseph Morris, who now saw that further -secrecy would be useless. “Surrender, you villains, or we’ll shoot you -down like dogs!” - -“Thet’s the talk!” came from Barringford, and as he saw one of the -Indians raise a gun he shot the warrior through the heart. - -The next instant the entire camp was in alarm. Thinking a large body of -English had arrived, the few Indians present took to their heels and -disappeared into the forest as if by magic. The Frenchmen tried to -follow, fighting as they did so. Jean Bevoir aimed a pistol at Dave and -fired, the bullet striking the youth in the side. As he staggered and -fell Henry fired at the French trader, and so did two others, and Bevoir -threw up his arms and pitched headlong into the smoldering campfire, -scattering the embers in all directions. - -Inside of five minutes the battle was at an end and the English were in -complete possession of the camp and had also gained possession of their -horses and a large portion of their stores. What was left of the French -and Indians disappeared, and that was the last seen of them. - -[Illustration: Bevoir pitched headlong into the smoldering -campfire.—_Page 298._] - -Dave’s wound was but slight, and his first thoughts were of his father. -The two embraced over and over again, the tears of joy standing in the -eyes of each. Joseph Morris, Henry, and Barringford were likewise more -than happy to learn that the trader was really alive. - -“I am the only one living to tell the tale,” said James Morris. “The -others were killed or mortally wounded.” - -“Not all,” answered Dave. “Peaceful Jones escaped and told us the news, -and that is what brought us here so quickly.” - -“You have had a great fight. I could hear some of the shooting,” -continued the trader. - -“Yes, and we might have had the worst of it, only White Buffalo came to -our aid.” - -“And where is he now?” - -“Gone in pursuit of Moon Eye and his followers.” - -After that James Morris told his story in detail, to which Dave and the -others listened with much interest. - -“At first I was kept at the post,” said he. “Jean Bevoir pretended to be -kind and considerate, but I soon found out his object. He had drawn up -some documents stating that I surrendered to him all my rights and -interests in the trading post and he wanted me to sign them. When I -refused he got angry and wanted to kill me. But some of the men -interfered and then I was brought to this place. Then, of a sudden, I -was treated better again. From the Indians I learned that Bevoir had an -idea that if he got cornered later on he would use me in some way for -his benefit—as a hostage, or something like that.” - -“Just what he wanted to do with me, when I was a prisoner,” said Henry. -“It is queer that I didn’t see you when I was here,” he added. - -“They must have kept us apart purposely, Henry.” James Morris drew a -long breath. “How good it feels to be together once more. I declare, it -seems to brace me up wonderfully!” And his face showed his relief. - -Somebody had dragged Jean Bevoir’s body from the fire just after the man -fell. The trader was not yet dead, and lay groaning and writhing in a -fearful manner. Nothing could be done for him, and he died at sunrise. -It was the last of a misspent life, full of golden opportunities which -the rascal had trampled under foot. His body was laid in a hollow and -some flat stones placed over it, to keep off the wild animals. His -pockets were searched and the fraudulent documents confiscated by Joseph -Morris. - -“We must get back to the post as soon as we can,” said Barringford, -after the excitement was over. “Remember, we don’t know how matters are -a-goin’ there.” - -“I have heard no shots,” answered Henry. “And that is a good sign.” - -“I do not see how anything can be wrong there,” said Dave. “We have -wound up the Bevoir crowd and you can trust White Buffalo to take care -of Moon Eye’s tribe.” - -Nevertheless, the start for the trading post was made as soon as matters -could be gotten into shape for the journey. The two sick men were -carried on stretchers made of blankets tied to long poles, and all took -turns at the task. Dave did not mind the load at all, and in the joy at -finding his parent forgot all about his own injuries, which, -fortunately, proved slight. - -The strange man who was sick wanted to know what it all meant, and -smiled when told. Then he heaved a sudden sigh. - -“I, too, have had many troubles,” he said. “Many, many troubles. I wish -that I could get some help.” - -“We will aid you all we can,” said Henry, kindly. - -“Yes, yes, I know. But my head—it is not clear. My brain whirls when I -try to think. The past is such a blank!” - -“You were hit on the head, that’s the trouble,” went on the youth. “But -I think you will get over it soon.” - -“Perhaps—some days I know I feel better. But then my head whirls again -and I am in the dark! Oh, it is awful!” And the sick man sighed as -before. - -“Can’t you remember where you came from at all?” - -“I remember the sea—the great boundless ocean, and a great storm. I was -alone then—all alone. And I remember before that,—a beautiful garden and -kind friends and relatives, and the babies, the beautiful babies! And -then I remember—I remember——” The man paused. “It is cloudy again—dark—I -can remember nothing, nothing!” And he lay back and closed his eyes. - -“Maybe as how he’ll never be jest right ag’in,” whispered Sam -Barringford. “It’s terribul, no two ways on’t! I wish I could do -somethin’ fer him.” - -“It will take time,” said Joseph Morris. “It is useless to worry him -now, it will only make matters worse.” And so they let the strange man -rest in peace. They had previously searched his pockets, but had found -nothing by which he could be identified. - -The journey to the trading post accomplished, they found matters quiet -there. No more of the enemy had appeared, and nothing had been seen of -White Buffalo and his followers. The old Delaware chief came in about -noon, bringing the news that Moon Eye’s tribe had been completely -shattered. - -“They will never trouble my white friends again,” said White Buffalo. -“Those who are left alive have learned a lesson which they will never -forget.” - -The old Indian chief was more than glad to learn that James Morris was -living, and shook hands warmly. - -“You have done me and mine a great service, White Buffalo,” said the -trader, gratefully. “We shall not forget it.” - -“White Buffalo knows his real friends,” answered the aged chief, calmly. -“He is glad to serve them.” Then he and his warriors went off to get -something to eat, for they had had nothing since the day before. They -were treated to the best the post afforded. - -Among those found living after the battle at the post was Benoit Vascal. -He had been sorely wounded and trampled upon in the mêlée, and it was -evident he could not long survive his hurts. He was placed on a rude -couch and there he remained, since he could swallow neither food nor -water. He groaned continually and bitterly bewailed the fate that had -brought him to the place. - -When the strange sick man was brought in he was placed on a cot not far -from where Benoit Vascal was resting. For some time the two did not -notice each other. Then, of a sudden, the Frenchman glanced at the other -and uttered a shriek of amazement and terror. - -“’Tis he! ’Tis he! Tis the judgment!” he screamed in French. “Take him -away! I cannot bear to face him!” - -At the sound of Vascal’s voice the strange sick man turned over and gave -him a wandering look. Then he also started up and gave a cry. - -“You! you!” he screamed. “You! I know you, Benoit Vascal! What have you -done with my children!” He staggered from his couch, fell forward, and -caught the Frenchman by the arm. “Tell me! My children, what of them?” - -“What’s the matter here?” demanded Sam Barringford, who chanced to be -close by. - -“This man!” panted the strange sick man. “He—he stole my children! He is -the rascal I have been hunting for—he and another, a Paul Camont. They -took my twin boys! Ah, I remember it all now! Where are my children? -Don’t dare to say you killed them!” - -“Your children—twins,” gasped the old frontiersman. “Can it be possible -thet you air Mr. Maurice Hamilton?” - -“Yes! yes! that is my name! How strange I could not think of it before. -Maurice Hamilton, yes, of London.” - -“Well, by the eternal!” came faintly from Barringford. He looked at the -sick man sharply. “It must be so—ye look alike, same eyes, same nose, -an’ all. This staggers me!” - -“Let me go!” came faintly from Benoit Vascal. “He has ze children—I haf -zem not, no! Let me go!” for the other man now held him by the throat. - -The cries and loud talking had attracted a crowd, and all pushed forward -to learn the cause of the disturbance. - -“It’s the greatest thing ye ever heard tell on,” said Sam Barringford. -“This man is Maurice Hamilton, and the father o’ the twins.” - -“Can it be possible!” exclaimed Dave. - -“But where—where are my children?” asked Maurice Hamilton. - -“They are safe—leas’wise they war, the last I heard o’ ’em,” answered -Barringford. “But this gits me! I never dreamed o’ sech a thing.” - -“Nor did I,” added Joseph Morris. - -After that there remained nothing to do but to tell Maurice Hamilton all -about his little ones, how Barringford had found them, and how they had -been cared for ever since by the Morrises. The sick man could not take -it all in, but he understood enough and the tears of joy streamed down -his wan face. - -“How I long to see them—my darling boys!” he murmured. - -“And you shall see them,” said Joseph Morris. “But first you must get -well.” - -“And what of—of that rascal who robbed me?” - -“He is dying—let him rest,” was the planter’s soft answer. And then, for -the time being, Maurice Hamilton was silent. From that hour on he mended -rapidly, both mentally and physically, until, two months later, he was -as well as ever. Benoit Vascal died two days later, and was buried in a -common grave, along with the other Frenchmen who had fallen in the -battle for the possession of the trading post. - -Maurice Hamilton’s story was a long one, and I have no space to relate -it here. He was a fairly well-to-do man who, after the death of his -beautiful wife and his father and mother, had come to America to seek -his fortune. Upon arriving here his twins had been stolen from him by -Benoit Vascal, aided by Paul Camont. He had in vain tried to follow the -rascals up, although he had received several letters offering to -compromise the matter for a certain amount. He said that his wife, when -a girl, had received an offer of marriage from Vascal and had refused -him, and this had made the Frenchman so bitter. The two gold lockets the -twins possessed contained the portraits of Mr. Hamilton’s father and -mother. - -“This clears up that mystery,” said Dave to Henry. “I must say I am glad -of it—on Mr. Hamilton’s account.” - -“Yes, and also on account of the twins,” answered his cousin. “But Sam -will hate to have them go, and mother and Nell will hate it, too.” - -“Well, such things can’t be helped.” - -Now that the fighting was over, all hands found a great many things to -do in and around the trading post. A new gate was put into place, -stronger even than the other, and the stockade generally was also -strengthened. The stable was enlarged, so that the numerous horses might -have proper quarters, and another room was built to the main building. -In the meantime some of the trappers and Indians went out on the hunt -and brought in plenty of meat and not a few skins of value. - -With the coming of spring came a fresh alarm, and it was not deemed wise -to send an expedition eastward. Pontiac was trying his best to combine -the Indians in another conspiracy. But his plans failed, and in the end -the noted Indian chief fell, brained by a tomahawk in the hands of -another Indian. So perished one of the most gifted and at the same time -one of the most warlike Indian chiefs this country ever saw. - -At last the way seemed clear for a start for Will’s Creek, and an -expedition set out, by way of Fort Pitt. Among those to go along were -Joseph Morris, Sam Barringford, Mr. Hamilton, and Henry. Mr. Hamilton -was feeling in the best of health once more, and he and the old -frontiersman had become warm friends. The gentleman wanted to reward -Barringford for what he had done, but the latter would not listen to it. - -“Let me see them twins now an’ then,” said the old frontiersman. “Thet -will be reward enough fer me.” And so it was arranged. - -It was a great day when the party reached the Morris homestead. Maurice -Hamilton hugged his children tightly to his breast and kissed them -repeatedly, and Mrs. Morris was so affected that she wept. - -“They are good boys,” she said. “I’ll hate awfully to have them go -away.” - -“Then supposing I leave them here for the present?” answered Maurice -Hamilton. “I have no home of my own.” - -“Yes! yes! Do leave them, please!” cried Nell; and so it was arranged, -much to the satisfaction of all concerned. - - -Here let me add a few words and then bring to a close this story of -“Trail and Trading Post,” and likewise this “Colonial Series.” - -During the ensuing summer matters fared very well both at the Morris -homestead and at the trading post. The twins grew up healthy and strong, -and looked upon Sam Barringford as their uncle, which pleased the old -frontiersman mightily. Mr. Hamilton came and went, for he had property -on the St. Lawrence and near Philadelphia to look after. He was glad to -have his children in such excellent care. - -“I hope them little chaps never see sech fightin’ as we’ve seen,” said -Barringford to Henry one day, as he was dancing both on his knees. - -“I don’t think they will,” answered Henry. But he was mistaken. The -twins did see some spirited fighting—during the Revolutionary War—the -particulars of which I may relate some other time. They were such -sturdy, manly chaps that nobody could help but like them. - -During the summer the trading post was attacked just once, by a band of -Indians, under an old chief who in years gone by had been one of the -Morrises’ worst foes. The warriors were defeated without a loss among -the whites, while the Indians lost several men, including the chief. -After that the red men remained away from that territory for many years -to come. - -As soon as peace was firmly established, other traders flocked to the -Ohio, followed by regular settlers. Many of the posts were valuable, but -none more so than that belonging to the Morrises. More than this, James -Morris and Dave dealt fairly by all who wished to do business with them, -be they whites or Indians, and as a consequence they soon established a -reputation that was known far and wide. The very best skins and furs -were offered to them, and they began to make money rapidly. - -“How things have changed since first we came out here,” said Dave one -day. “And what a number of events have happened since then!” - -“Let us be thankful that all has ended well,” replied his father. “Many -have suffered deeply, while we have escaped.” - -“I am thankful,” said Dave, reverently. “Very thankful indeed!” - -White Buffalo, who stood near, nodded his head slowly. - -“The Great Spirit has watched over us all,” said he. “Blessed be the -Great Spirit, both of the white man and of the Indians.” - - - THE END - ------------------------------------------------------------------------- - - - - - EDWARD STRATEMEYER’S BOOKS - - - Old Glory Series - - _Six Volumes._ _Cloth._ _Illustrated._ _Price per volume $1.25._ - - UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA. - A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA. - FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS. - UNDER OTIS IN THE PHILIPPINES. - THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE. - UNDER MacARTHUR IN LUZON. - - - Soldiers of Fortune Series - - _Cloth._ _Illustrated._ _Price per volume $1.25._ - - ON TO PEKIN. - UNDER THE MIKADO’S FLAG. - AT THE FALL OF PORT ARTHUR - WITH TOGO FOR JAPAN. - - - Colonial Series - - _Cloth._ _Illustrated._ _Price per volume $1.25._ - - WITH WASHINGTON IN THE WEST. - MARCHING ON NIAGARA. - AT THE FALL OF MONTREAL. - THE FORT IN THE WILDERNESS. - ON THE TRAIL OF PONTIAC. - TRAIL AND TRADING POST. - - - Mexican War Series - - _Cloth._ _Illustrated._ _Price per volume $1.25._ - - FOR THE LIBERTY OF TEXAS. - WITH TAYLOR ON THE RIO GRANDE. - UNDER SCOTT IN MEXICO. - - - Pan-American Series - - _Cloth._ _Illustrated._ _Price per volume $1.25._ - - LOST ON THE ORINOCO. - THE YOUNG VOLCANO EXPLORERS. - YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE ISTHMUS. - YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE AMAZON. - TREASURE SEEKERS OF THE ANDES. - - - Dave Porter Series - - _Cloth._ _Illustrated._ _Price per volume $1.25._ - - DAVE PORTER AT OAK HALL. - DAVE PORTER IN THE SOUTH SEAS. - DAVE PORTER’S RETURN TO SCHOOL. - DAVE PORTER IN THE FAR NORTH. - DAVE PORTER AND HIS CLASSMATES. - - - Lakeport Series - - _Cloth._ _Illustrated._ _Price per volume $1.25._ - - THE GUN CLUB BOYS OF LAKEPORT. - THE BASEBALL BOYS OF LAKEPORT. - THE BOAT CLUB BOYS OF LAKEPORT. - THE FOOT BALL BOYS OF LAKEPORT. - - - American Boys’ Biographical Series - - _Cloth._ _Illustrated._ _Price per volume $1.25._ - - AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF WILLIAM McKINLEY. - AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF THEODORE ROOSEVELT. - - - Stratemeyer Popular Series - - _Twelve Volumes._ _Cloth._ _Illustrated._ _Price per volume $0.75._ - - TWO YOUNG LUMBERMEN. _Price $1.25._ - BETWEEN BOER AND BRITON. _Price $1.25._ - DEFENDING HIS FLAG. _Price $1.50._ - - - - - THE LAKEPORT SERIES - - - By EDWARD STRATEMEYER - - - VOLUME ONE - -_THE GUN CLUB BOYS OF LAKEPORT_ - - _Or The Island Camp_ - - =321 pages= =Illustrated= =Price $1.25= - -A bright, breezy, outdoor story, telling how several lads organized a -gun club and went camping in the winter time. They had with them a -trusty old hunter who revealed to them many of the secrets of Nature as -found in the woods. A volume any boy who loves a gun will appreciate. - - This story of camping and hunting will appeal to every American - boy.—_Register, New Haven, Conn._ - - - VOLUME TWO - -_THE BASEBALL BOYS OF LAKEPORT_ - - _Or The Winning Run_ - - =315 pages= =Illustrated= =Price $1.25= - -With the coming of summer the boys turned their attention to baseball -and organized a club, and played many thrilling games. The rivalry was -of the keenest, and the particulars are given of a plot to injure the -Lakeport nine and make them lose the most important game of all. - - Will appeal to every healthy American boy.—_American, Baltimore, - Md._ - - - VOLUME THREE - -_THE BOAT CLUB BOYS OF LAKEPORT_ - - _Or The Water Champions_ - - =300 pages= =Illustrated= =Price $1.25= - -This time the scene is shifted to the lake. The boys all know how to row -and sail a boat, and they organize a club and have fun galore. During a -squall on the lake something of great value is lost overboard. The -abduction of a little girl adds to the interest of the volume. Every lad -who loves the water will read this volume with pleasure. - - This author knows how to please red-blooded lads.—_Times-Union, - Albany, N. Y._ - - -Mr. Stratemeyer’s popularity will be increased by “Dave Porter.”—_Times, -Hartford, Conn._ - - - - - DAVE PORTER SERIES - - - By EDWARD STRATEMEYER - - - VOLUME ONE - -_DAVE PORTER AT OAK HALL_ - - _Or the Schooldays of an American Boy_ - - =312 pages= =Illustrated= =Price $1.25= - -Never was there a brighter, more manly, thoroughly up-to-date boy than -Dave Porter, and all boys who read about him, and girls too, for the -matter of that, will be sure to love him from the start. How, as a green -country boy, he went to Oak Hall, how he was hazed, and how he had to -fight his way through is told with a naturalness that is true to life. - - The story is told with great fidelity to real life.—_Eagle, - Brooklyn, N. Y._ - - - VOLUME TWO - -_DAVE PORTER IN THE SOUTH SEAS_ - - _Or The Strange Cruise of the Stormy Petrel_ - - =286 pages= =Illustrated= =Price $1.25= - -Dave is the same bright, wide-awake youth he was at school, and his -adventures on shipboard and among the unexplored islands of the South -Seas will render him dearer to the hearts of the boys than ever. Dave is -trying to solve the mystery of his parentage, and several of his school -chums are with him during his wanderings, some sharing his perils. A -great tidal wave sends the ship into a strange harbor and there follows -a mutiny which places a number on board in great peril. - - Mr. Stratemeyer’s heroes are full of fun, and the activity that goes - with youth, strength and high spirits. They are all safe—they work - hard and play fairly.—_Star, Washington, D. C._ - - Mr. Stratemeyer has seldom introduced a more popular hero than Dave - Porter. He is a typical boy, manly, brave, always ready for a good - time if it can be obtained in an honorable way.—_Wisconsin, - Milwaukee, Wis._ - - - VOLUME THREE - -_DAVE PORTER’S RETURN TO SCHOOL_ - - _Or Winning the Medal of Honor_ - - =304 pages= =Illustrated= =Price $1.25= - -In this volume the scene is shifted back to Oak Hall, and once again -Dave becomes the centre of as interesting a group of schoolboys as it is -possible to imagine. There is a strong plot, with plenty of fun, and not -a few rivalries on the athletic field, and the whole volume has a swing -and a dash that are irresistible. - - A good wholesome story, full of fun and go.—_Christian Work, N. Y._ - - Each story that comes from Edward Stratemeyer’s pen is eagerly - read.—_Boston Herald._ - - - VOLUME FOUR - -_DAVE PORTER IN THE FAR NORTH_ - - _Or The Pluck of an American Schoolboy_ - - =285 pages= =Illustrated= =Price $1.25= - -In this book Dave is still at his well-liked boarding-school, Oak Hall, -with his lively but manly comrades, who rejoice with him that he not -only has discovered his parentage, but has a father and sister living, -though unaware of his existence. Dave cannot rest until he finds those -of his own family, and having secured leave of absence from school and -accompanied by his chum, the son of a United States Senator, he goes to -England only to find that his father has left on an expedition to the -upper part of Norway. The boys follow in a most exciting pursuit which -is replete with adventure. - - The success of the “Dave Porter Series” is already surpassing Mr. - Stratemeyer’s previous triumphs.—_American, Nashville, Tenn._ - - Dave Porter is a typical American schoolboy, a scholar, an athlete - and a good fellow.—_Herald, Rochester, N. Y._ - - - - - SOLDERS OF FORTUNE SERIES - - - By EDWARD STRATEMEYER - - - VOLUME ONE - -_ON TO PEKIN_ - - _Or Old Glory in China_ - - =Cloth= =330 pages= =Illustrated by A. B. Shute= =$1.25= - -The hero, Gilbert Pennington, goes from the Philippines with the Ninth -Regiment to take part in the rescue of the beleaguered British Embassy -at Pekin by the international forces. Mr. Stratemeyer has risen to the -occasion by giving, in addition to one of his very best stories, a store -of information concerning China and the Chinese, conveyed in a natural -and entertaining manner. - -The demands of boy readers are peculiar, and the author who can satisfy -them, not once or twice, but uniformly, must possess rare ability in an -extremely difficult field. Such an author is Edward Stratemeyer.—_Sunday -News, Newark, N. J._ - - - VOLUME TWO - -_UNDER THE MIKADO’S FLAG_ - - _Or Young Soldiers of Fortune_ - - =320 pages= =Cloth= =Illustrated by A. B. Shute= =Price $1.25= - -“Under the Mikado’s Flag” relates the adventures of two young Americans -in Korea and Manchuria during the outbreak of the great war between -Russia and Japan, one of the leading characters being Gilbert -Pennington, the hero of “On to Pekin,” and the other, Ben Russell, who -with his brothers, Larry and Walter, is so well known to the thousands -of readers of the famous “Old Glory Series.” It closes with the great -Battle of Liao-Yang, and is as valuable for the information conveyed as -it is interesting as a story. - -Mr. Stratemeyer is undoubtedly improving very greatly on the average -book for boys.—_Star, St. Louis, Mo._ - -He knows how to attract and hold boy readers.—_Evening Standard, New -Bedford, Mass._ - - - VOLUME THREE - -_AT THE FALL OF PORT ARTHUR_ - - _Or A Young American in the Japanese Navy_ - - =300 pages= =Illustrated by A. B. Shute= =Price $1.25= - -This story relates, primarily, the adventures of Larry Russell, who is -on board his old ship, the _Columbia_, which is carrying a cargo for the -Japanese government. The young sailor joins the Japanese navy, and under -Admiral Togo assists at the bombardment of Port Arthur. Life in the -Japanese navy is described in detail, and also life in Port Arthur -during the siege and bombardment, which has few parallels in history. - - “At the Fall of Port Arthur” is very well told.—_Chronicle, San - Francisco._ - - A rattling good story for boys.—_Republican, Denver, Col._ - - - VOLUME FOUR - -_UNDER TOGO FOR JAPAN_ - - _Or Three Young Americans on Land and Sea_ - - =310 pages= =Illustrated by A. B. Shute= =12mo= =Cloth $1.25= - -The “Soldiers of Fortune Series” is a continuation of the famous “Old -Glory Series,” and enjoys equal popularity. The principal characters are -Ben and Larry Russell, Gilbert Pennington, and the fine old gunner, Luke -Striker, all of whom are well known to thousands of readers. The climax -of the book naturally deals with the Battle of the Sea of Japan and -Admiral Togo’s wonderful victory, in which Larry and Luke Striker bear -an honorable part. The fortunes of Ben and Gilbert Pennington on land -also furnish much that is of interest. - - The youth who finds a good story of war adventure on the sea to his - liking will gain his heart’s desire in “Under Togo for - Japan.”—_Philadelphia Press._ - - Young readers will find the volume entertaining from first to - last.—_News, Baltimore, Md._ - - Will undoubtedly prove a favorite with the boys.—_Advertiser, - Newark, N. J._ - - No more popular book for boys could be imagined just at this - time.—_Christian Endeavor World._ - - - - - PAN-AMERICAN SERIES - - - By EDWARD STRATEMEYER - - - VOLUME ONE - -_LOST ON THE ORINOCO_ - - _Or American Boys in Venezuela_ - - =12mo= =Cloth= =Illustrated= =Price $1.25= - -This volume tells of five American youths, who, with their tutor, sail -from New York to La Guayra, touching at Curaçao on the way. They visit -Caracas, go westward to the Gulf of Maracaibo and lake of the same name, -and at last find themselves in the region of the mighty Orinoco, and of -course they have some exciting experiences, one of which gives name to -the book. - - Its pictures of South American life and scenery are novel and - instructive.—_The Literary World, Boston._ - - The scenes described are of the sort to charm the hearts of - adventurous boys.—_The Outlook, N. Y._ - - - VOLUME TWO - -_THE YOUNG VOLCANO EXPLORERS_ - - _Or American Boys in the West Indies_ - - =12mo= =Cloth= =Illustrated= =Price $1.25= - -The boys, with their tutor, sail from Venezuela to the West Indies, -stopping at Jamaica, Cuba, Hayti, and Porto Rico. They have numerous -adventures on the way, and then set out for St. Pierre, Martinique, -where they encounter the effects of the eruption of Mt. Pelee, and two -of the boys are left on a raft to shift for themselves. Life in the West -Indies is well portrayed. - - - VOLUME THREE - -_YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE ISTHMUS_ - - _Or American Boys in Central America_ - - =306 pages= =Cloth= =Illustrated by A. B. Shute= =Price $1.25= - -Relates adventures in a tour covering Nicaragua, Costa Rica, and the -Isthmus of Panama. The party travel the various canal routes, and have a -number of highly interesting experiences. The volume contains a vast -amount of timely information, and will be read with interest by young -men as well as boys. - - - VOLUME FOUR - -_YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE AMAZON_ - - _Or American Boys in Brazil_ - - =300 pages= =12mo= =Illustrated by A. B. Shute= =Price $1.25= - -An absorbing tale of sight-seeing and adventures in Brazil. The five -boys and their tutor travel the whole seacoast from Rio de Janeiro to -Para, and then move up the Amazon into the rubber country and beyond. -The volume is filled with pen pictures of life as it exists in Brazil -to-day, and will be heartily enjoyed by all young people. - - The Pan-American Series by Edward Stratemeyer has been declared by - the boys of this country to be the most up-to-date of all reading - for the young. Filled with action and good fellowship.—_Waverley - Magazine._ - - - VOLUME FIVE - -_TREASURE SEEKERS OF THE ANDES_ - - _Or American Boys in Peru_ - - =310 pages= =Illustrated by Charles Nuttall= =Price $1.25= - -This volume takes the young explorers from the head of the Amazon River -to the coast of Peru and then into the mighty snow-topped mountains. One -of the boys obtains possession of a secret regarding a Spanish treasure -and, with a companion, goes in quest of the same, and both get lost in a -series of caves. The volume is up-to-date and will please both young and -old. - - Mr. Stratemeyer has acquired the art of weaving a good deal of solid - information with his web of startling adventure.—_San Francisco - Bulletin._ - - - - - COLONIAL SERIES - - - By EDWARD STRATEMEYER - - - FIRST VOLUME - -_WITH WASHINGTON IN THE WEST_ - - _Or a Soldier Boy’s Battles in the Wilderness_ - - =Illustrated by A. B. Shute= =302 pages= =$1.25= - -Mr. Stratemeyer has woven into an excellent story something of -Washington’s youthful experience as a surveyor, leading on to the always -thrilling Braddock’s defeat. The hero, David Morris, is several years -younger than Washington, with whom he becomes intimately associated. -Pictures of pioneer life are given; scenes with friendly Indians; and -old-time games. - - - SECOND VOLUME - -_MARCHING ON NIAGARA_ - - _Or The Soldier Boys of the Old Frontier_ - - =Illustrated by A. B. Shute= =Price $1.25= - -The story relates the doings of two young soldiers who join the Colonial -forces in a march on Fort Niagara, during the time of the war with -France, when the whole territory between the Blue Ridge and the Great -Lakes was in a state of unrest. Many side lights are thrown into the -colonial homes, and much useful information is given of the pioneers who -helped to make our country what it is to-day. - - David Morris is a fine fellow, and about him is woven a fine “Injun” - story that is sure to delight the boys.—_Universalist Leader, - Boston._ - - - THIRD VOLUME - -_AT THE FALL OF MONTREAL_ - - _Or a Soldier Boy’s Final Victory_ - - =Illustrated by A. B. Shute= =Price $1.25= - -This volume relates the adventures of Dave Morris and his cousin Henry -during the two last campaigns against the French for the possession of -Canada and the territory below the great lakes. The scaling of the -heights of Quebec under General Wolfe, and the memorable battle on the -Plains of Abraham, are given in detail. There are many stirring scenes -of battle, and there are also adventures while fishing and hunting, and -with the Indians. - - The chief charm of Mr. Stratemeyer’s stories lies in the fact that - an enormous quantity of valuable information, collected from the - most reliable sources, is deftly woven into the narrative without - taking away from the interest.—_Philadelphia Inquirer._ - - - FOURTH VOLUME - -_ON THE TRAIL OF PONTIAC_ - - _Or Pioneer Boys of the Ohio_ - - =Illustrated by A. B. Shute= =Price $1.25= - -This volume tells of times in our country immediately after the war with -France for the possession of Canada. A fight with the Indians and the -French in a snowstorm is especially realistic, and the entire book -carries with it the atmosphere of colonial times. - - Boys are attracted to stories by Edward Stratemeyer, and they will - enjoy “On the Trail of Pontiac.”—_Plain Dealer, Cleveland, O._ - - - VOLUME FIVE - -_THE FORT IN THE WILDERNESS_ - - _Or The Soldier Boys of the Indian Trails_ - - =306 pages= =Illustrated by A. B. Shute= =Price $1.25= - -This story is one of the best tales of Colonial days penned by this -favorite author for young people. A central figure is the noted Indian -warrior, Pontiac, and the particulars are given of the rise and fall of -that awful conspiracy against the whites, which will never be forgotten, -and vivid pen pictures are given of fights in and around the forts and -at a trading post on the Ohio. - - - VOLUME SIX - -_TRAIL AND TRADING POST_ - - _Or The Young Hunters of the Ohio_ - - =320 pages= =Illustrated= =Price $1.25= - -A fine closing volume to this deservingly popular series. Here we again -meet the Morris boys, and many other friends. The plot centres about the -possession of a certain trading post on the Ohio River at a time just -previous to the Revolution, and there are some encounters with the -unfriendly Indians and with some Frenchmen who wished to claim the post -as their own. - - There are few authors whose books have so wide and so thoroughly - satisfactory a reading as those by Mr. Stratemeyer.—_Courier, - Boston._ - - - - - GOOD BOOKS FOR BOYS - - - By EDWARD STRATEMEYER - - -_TWO YOUNG LUMBERMEN_ - - _Or From Maine to Oregon for Fortune_ - - =320 pages= =Cloth= =Illustrated= =Price $1.25= - -A splendid story, the scene shifting from Maine to Michigan and the -Great Lakes, and then to the Columbia and the Great Northwest. The -heroes are two sturdy youths who have been brought up among the -lumbermen of their native State, and who strike out in an honest -endeavor to better their condition. An ideal volume for every wide-awake -American who wishes to know what our great lumber industry is to-day. - - Mr. Stratemeyer’s books are not only entertaining but - instructive.—_Daily Press, Portland, Me._ - - Profitable reading for its information concerning a great American - industry.—_Outlook, New York._ - - The book is an excellent one for youngsters.—_Republican, - Springfield, Mass._ - - A rattling good story.—_Herald, Baltimore, Md._ - - Mr. Stratemeyer is able to give an air of reality to his work which - commends it.—_Chicago News._ - - -_BETWEEN BOER AND BRITON_ - - _Or Two Boys’ Adventures in South Africa_ - - =Illustrated by A. Burnham Shute= =354 pages= =Price $1.25= - -Relates the experiences of two boys, cousins to each other, one American -and the other English, whose fathers are engaged in the Transvaal, one -in farming and the other in mining operations. While the two boys are -off on a hunting trip after big game the war between the Boers and -Britons suddenly breaks out, and while endeavoring to rejoin their -parents the boys find themselves placed between hostile armies. - - A stirring story of the South African War.—_The Journal, - Indianapolis, Ind._ - - Mr. Stratemeyer certainly gets right next to the boys’ heart in his - excellent stories of adventure.—_News, Providence, R. I._ - - The author is one of the most accomplished writers for the - young.—_San Francisco Chronicle._ - - - - - Both Sides of the Great Civil War - - -_DEFENDING HIS FLAG_ - - _Or A Boy in Blue and a Boy in Gray_ - - By Edward Stratemeyer - - =431 pages= =Eight full-page illustrations by Griswold Tyng= - =Beautifully bound in colors and gold= =Price $1.50= - -This tale relates the adventures of two boys, or rather young men, -during the first campaign of our great Civil War. One enlists in the -infantry of the North, while the other throws in his fortunes with the -cavalry of the South. Of the story Mr. Stratemeyer himself says: - - “In writing this work I have had but one object in view, and that - was to give a faithful picture of a part of the Civil War as seen - from both sides of that never-to-be-forgotten conflict. During the - war, and for years afterward, grown folk and young people were - treated to innumerable books on the subject, all written from either - the Northern or the Southern point of view, thoroughly biased, and - calculated to do more harm than good. I think the time has come when - the truth, and the whole truth at that, can be told, and when it - will do positive good. Since the Spanish-American War, when some of - the gallant Southern officers and men made such records for - themselves under Old Glory, the old lines have been practically - wiped out. The reconstructed South is as firm a part of our nation - as was the old South during the first half of the last century, and - it has a perfect right to honor the memories of those who, while - wearing the gray and marching under the stars and bars, fought so - gallantly for what they considered was right and true.” - - The mantle of Henty, as a writer of books of history and travel for - boys, seems to have fallen on Mr. Stratemeyer.—_Zion’s Herald, - Boston._ - - Everybody knows that Edward Stratemeyer is the most widely read of - all living American writers for boys.—_Dispatch, Pittsburg, Pa._ - - - - - American Boys’ Biographical Series - - - By EDWARD STRATEMEYER - - - VOLUME ONE - - _AMERICAN BOYS’_ - - _LIFE OF WILLIAM McKINLEY_ - - =300 pages= =Illustrated by A. B. Shute and from Photographs= - =$1.25= - -Here is told the whole story of McKinley’s boyhood days, his life at -school and at college, his work as a school teacher, his glorious career -in the army, his struggles to obtain a footing as a lawyer, his efforts -as a Congressman and a Governor, and lastly his prosperous career as our -President, all told in a style particularly adapted to boys and young -men. The book is full of interesting anecdotes, all taken from life, -showing fully the sincere, honest, painstaking efforts of a life cut all -too short. The volume will prove an inspiration to all boys and young -men, and should be in every library. - - For nearly a year Mr. Stratemeyer has been gathering material and - giving careful study to the life of the young William, his - childhood, his boyhood, and all his inspiring and romantic history. - The story was nearing its end when the awful finale came and tragedy - ended the drama of President McKinley’s life.—_New York Journal._ - - - VOLUME TWO - - _AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF_ - - _THEODORE ROOSEVELT_ - - =300 pages= =12mo= =Illustrated from Photographs= =$1.25= - -[Illustration] - -This excellent work for young people covers the whole life of our -strenuous executive, as schoolboy, college student, traveler, author, -hunter and ranchman, as assemblyman, as civil service commissioner, as -Assistant Secretary of the Navy, as a daring rough rider, as Governor of -New York, and lastly as President. Full of stories taken from real life -and fold in a manner to interest both young and old. - - We unreservedly recommend Mr. Stratemeyer’s books for boys. They are - wholesome, accurate as to historical details, and always - interesting.—_Boston Times._ - ------------------------------------------------------------------------- - - - - - TRANSCRIBER’S NOTES - - - 1. P. 2, changed “there any unfriendly Indians” to “there are any - unfriendly Indians”. - 2. Silently corrected typographical errors and variations in spelling. - 3. Archaic, non-standard, and uncertain spellings retained as printed. - 4. Enclosed italics font in _underscores_. - 5. Enclosed bold font in =equals=. - - - - - -End of Project Gutenberg's Trail and Trading Post, by Edward Stratemeyer - -*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TRAIL AND TRADING POST *** - -***** This file should be named 63431-0.txt or 63431-0.zip ***** -This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: - http://www.gutenberg.org/6/3/4/3/63431/ - -Produced by Richard Tonsing, WebRover, MFR, and the Online -Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This -file was produced from images generously made available -by The Internet Archive) - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, unless you receive -specific permission. If you do not charge anything for copies of this -eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may use this eBook -for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, -performances and research. They may be modified and printed and given -away--you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks -not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the -trademark license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country outside the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you - are located before using this ebook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and The -Project Gutenberg Trademark LLC, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is in Fairbanks, Alaska, with the -mailing address: PO Box 750175, Fairbanks, AK 99775, but its -volunteers and employees are scattered throughout numerous -locations. Its business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, Salt -Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up to -date contact information can be found at the Foundation's web site and -official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. - |